Download Samsung DVD-C450

DVD-C450K/C450
DVD-C360
DVD-C350K/C350
DVD Player
User Manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/global/register
AK68-01947A
ENGLISH
precautions
1. Setting up
- Refer to the identification label located on
the rear of your player for its proper operating voltage.
- Install your player in a cabinet with adequate ventilation holes. (7~10cm) Do not
block ventilation holes on any of the components for air circulation.
- Do not push the disc tray in by hand.
- Do not stack components.
- Be sure to turn all components off before
moving the player.
- Before connecting other components to this
player, be sure to turn them off.
- Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the
player after use, especially if you are not
going to use it for a long time.
- The mains plug is used as a disconnect
device and shall stay readily operable at
any time.
2. For your safety
- This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls
or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
- Do not open covers and do not repair yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personal.
3. Caution
- Your player is not intended for industrial
use but for domestic purposes. Use of this
product is for personal use only.
- Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on
the apparatus.
- Exterior influences such as lightning and
static electricity can affect normal operation
of this player. If this occurs, turn the player
off and on again with the POWER button,
or disconnect and then reconnect the AC
power cord to the AC power outlet. The
player will operate normally.
- When condensation forms inside the player
due to sharp changes in temperature, the
2
Contents
player may not operate correctly. If this
occurs, leave the player at room temperature until the inside of the player becomes
dry and operational.
4. Disc
- Do not use record-cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents that
may cause damage to the disc surface.
- Do not touch the disc’s signal surface. Hold
by the edges or by one edge and the hole
in the center.
- Wipe the dirt away gently; never wipe a
cloth back and forth over the disc.
5. Environmental info
- The battery used in this product contains chemicals that are harmful to the environment.
- So, dispose of batteries in the proper man
ner, according to federal, state, and local
regulations.
The product unit accompanying this user manual
is licensed under certain intellectual property
rights of certain third parties. This license is limited to private non-commercial use by end-user
consumers for licensed contents. No rights are
granted for commercial use. The license does
not cover any product unit other than this product unit and the license does not extend to any
unlicensed product unit or process conforming
to ISO/OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3 used
or sold in combination with this product unit. The
license only covers the use of this product unit to
encode and/or decode audio files conforming to
the ISO/OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3. No
rights are granted under this license for product
features or functions that do not conform to the
ISO/OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3.
CAUTION: USE OF ANY CONTROLS,
ADJUSTMENTS, OR PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
7
7
7
7
7
8
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4
CD Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Folder Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MPEG4 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Playing media files Using the USB Host
Feature (Only DVD-C360,C450,C450K) . . . . . . 9
CD Ripping (Only DVD-C360,C450,C450K) . 10
Picture CD Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Karaoke Function
Karaoke Function (Only DVD-C450K,C350K).10
Changing Setup Menu
Using the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Language Features. . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Audio Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Parental Control . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Divx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Reference
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Excellent Sound
Dolby Digital, a technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, provides crystal clear sound reproduction.
Screen
Both regular and widescreen(16:9) pictures can
be viewed.
Slow Motion
An important scene can be viewed in slow
motion.
Parental Control (DVD)
The parental control allows users to set the level
necessary to prohibit children from viewing harmful movies such as those with violence, adult
subject matter, etc.
Various On-Screen Menu
Functions
You can select various languages (Audio/Subtitle)
and screen angles while enjoying movies.
Progressive Scan
Progressive scanning creates an improved picture
with double the scan lines of a conventional interlaced picture.
EZ VIEW (DVD)
Easy View enables picture adjustment to match
your TV's screen size (16:9 or 4:3).
Digital Photo Viewer (JPEG)
You can view Digital Photos on your TV.
Repeat
You can repeat a song or movie simply by pressing the REPEAT button.
MP3/WMA
This unit can play discs created from MP3/WMA
files.
MPEG4
This unit can play MPEG4 formats within an avi
file.
CD Ripping
(Only DVD-C450K,C450,C360)
This feature lets you copy audio files from discs
to USB device into MP3 format. (only audio CD
(CD DA)
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tour of the Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections
Choosing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Functions
Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Search and Skip Functions . . . . . . .
Using the Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc Menu and Title Menu . . . . . . .
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slow Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View). . . . . . . .
Selecting the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Subtitle Language. . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Camera Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Bookmark Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Zoom Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
setup
General Features
Note
- Discs which cannot be played with this player.
• DVD-ROM
• DVD-RAM
• CD-ROM
• CDV
• CDI
• CVD
• CDGs play audio only, not graphics.
- Ability to play back may depend on
recording conditions.
• DVD-R, +R
• CD-RW
• DVD+RW, -RW (V mode)
- The unit may not play certain CD-R, CD-RW and DVD-R due to the disc type or record
ing conditions.
COPY PROTECTION
Many DVD discs are encoded with copy
protection. Because of this, you should only
connect your DVD player directly to your TV,
not to a VCR. Connecting to a VCR results in
a distorted picture from copy-protected DVD
discs.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by methods
claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Rovi
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must
be auzthorized by Rovi Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Descriptions
Front Panel Controls
DVD-C450K
▼
▼
PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUTS
(576p)
“CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT
ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS
ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS
PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO
BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE, IN CASE
OF 576 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE
PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE
USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE
‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING YOUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 576p DVD
PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT SAMSUNG'S
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.”
DVD-C450
PAL
2
▼
▼
DVD-C360
DIGITAL
SOUND
1
2
▼
▼
2
▼
▼
3
4
▼
▼
3
▼
6
7
▼
▼
▼
4
5
6
7
▼
▼
▼
▼
5
3
5
6
7
▼
▼
▼
▼
Region Number
Play Region Number
PAL broadcast system in U.K,
France, Germany, etc.
Dolby Digital disc
STEREO
STEREO
▼
▼
1
Disc Markings
~
9
8
1
Stereo disc
Digital Audio disc
DTS disc
Both the DVD player and the discs are coded
by region. These regional codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the codes do not
match, the disc will not play.
DVD-C350K
The Region Number for this player is described
on the rear panel of the player.
1
8
2
3
5
6
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
3
5
6
▼
▼
▼
DivX Certification
DivX, DivX Certified,
and associated logos
are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc and
are used under license. DivX Certified to play
DivX video.
DVD-C350
1
2
▼
▼
MP3 disc
3
1. DISC TRAY
7. USB HOST
(Only DVD-C360, C450,C450K)
Connect digital still camera, MP3 player, memory stick, Card reader, or another removable
storage devices.
Place the disc here.
2. DISPLAY
Operation indicators are displayed here.
3. OPEN/CLOSE/STOP (
)
Press to open and close the disc tray
8. MIC 1/2
1
11
2
3
12
13
(Only DVD-C350K,C450K)
(Only DVD-C450K,C450)
Connect Microphone for karaoke functions.
Stop disc play.
9. MICROPHONE VOLUME
4. STOP (■)
5. PLAY/PAUSE ( )
Play or pause the disc / Stops Disc Play
6. POWER ON/OFF ( )
Turn On/Off the DVD Player
(Only DVD-C450K)
Use to adjust microphone volume level. Use the
button by pressing it. Turn it to the left or right to
control the volume.
Tour of the Remote Control
DVD-C450K
DVD-C450
DVD-C360
1
2
12
3
4
5
6
7
14
15
8
9
10
11
4
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
DVD-C350K
DVD-C350
1. DVD POWER Button
Turns the power on or off.
2. REPEAT Button
Allows you to repeat play
a title,
chapter, track, or disc.
3. DISC MENU Button
Brings up the Disc menu.
4. BOOKMARK
Quickly find bookmark sections of a DVD.
5. SEARCH Buttons ( / )
Allow you to search forward/
back ward through a disc.
6. STOP Button ( )
7. SKIP Buttons ( / )
Use to skip the title, chapter
or track
8. MENU Button
Brings up the DVD player’s
menu.
9. ENTER /π/†,√/® Buttons
This button functions as a
toggle switch.
10. AUDIO Button (√)
Use this button to access
various audio functions on
a disc.
11. INFO Button
Displays the current disc
mode.
12. OPEN/CLOSE ( ) Button
To open and close the disc
tray.
13. REPEAT A-B Button
Allows you to repeat A-B
disc.
14. USB Button
15. VIDEO SEL. Button
Selects video output formats.
16. PLAY/PAUSE Button ( )
Begin/Pause disc play.
17. SUBTITLE Button (π)
18. RETURN Button
Returns to a previous menu.
19. TITLE MENU Button (®)
Brings up the Title menu.
20. KARAOKE Button († )
(Only DVD-C450K)
Use to begin Karaoke functions.
21. CANCEL Button
Use to remove menus or
status displays from the
screen.
4
14
15
5
16
6
7
17
18
8
9
10
19
20
21
1. DVD POWER Button
Turns the power on or off.
2. REPEAT Button
Allows you to repeat play a
title, chapter, track, or disc.
3. DISC MENU Button
Brings up the Disc menu.
4. BOOKMARK
Quickly find bookmark sections
of a DVD.
5. STOP Button ( )
6. SKIP Buttons ( / )
Use to skip the title, chapter
or track
7. MENU Button
Brings up the DVD player’s
menu.
8. ENTER/π/†,√/® Buttons
This button functions as a
toggle switch.
9. AUDIO Button (√)
Use this button to access various audio functions on a disc.
10. INFO Button
Displays the current disc
mode.
11. OPEN/CLOSE ( ) Button
To open and close the disc
tray.
12. REPEAT A-B Button
Allows you to repeat A-B
disc.
13. ZOOM Button
Enlarges the DVD Picture.
14. VIDEO SEL. Button
Selects video output for
mats.
15. SEARCH Buttons ( / )
Allow you to search forward/
back ward through a disc.
16. PLAY/PAUSE Button ( )
Begin/Pause disc play.
17. SUBTITLE Button (π)
18. RETURN Button
Returns to a previous menu.
19. TITLE MENU Button (®)
Brings up the Title menu.
20. CANCEL Button
Use to remove menus
or status displays from the
screen.
21. KARAOKE Button (†)
(Only DVD-C350K)
Use to begin Karaoke func
tions.
connections
- Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Component signal from the DVD
player appears on the TV screen.
- Set the Video Output to I-SCAN/P-SCAN in the Display Setup menu. You can use the VIDEO
SEL. button to change the Video Output mode.
Choosing a Connection
The following shows examples of connections commonly used to connect the DVD player with a TV
and other components.
Before Connecting the DVD Player
- Always turn off the DVD player, TV, and other components before you connect or disconnect
any cables.
- Refer to the user’s manual of the additional components you are connecting for more information on those particular components.
Note
- What is "Progressive Scan"? Progressive scan has twice as many scanning lines as the interlace
output method has. Progressive scanning method can provide better and clearer picture quality.
A. Connecting to a TV (VIDEO)
- Using video/audio cables, connect the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals
on the rear of the DVD player to the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV.
- Turn on the DVD player and TV.
- Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Video signal from the DVD player
appears on the TV screen.
COAXIAL CABLE
BLUE
B
2-Channel stereo ampilfier,
Dolby digital or
DTS amplifier
WHITE
B. Connection to an Audio System (2 Channel Amplifier, Dolby Digital,MPEG2 or DTS Amplifier)
RED
RED
RED
YELLOW
VIDEO CABLE
AUDIO CABLE
RED
WHITE
WHITE
AUDIO CABLE
GREEN
WHITE
Note
- Noise may be generated if the audio cable is placed too close to the power cable.
- If you want to connect to an Amplifier, please refer to the Amplifier connection section below.
- The number and position of terminals can vary depending on your TV set. Please refer to the user's manual of the TV.
- If there is one audio input terminal on the TV, connect it to the [AUDIO OUT][left] (white) terminal
of the DVD player.
- If you press the VIDEO SEL. button when DVD Player is in stop mode or no disc is inserted, the
Video Output mode changes in the following sequence: (I-SCAN ➝ P-SCAN ).
RED
A
C
COMPONENT CABLE
YELLOW
RED BLUE GREEN
- Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of the Amplifier. If using a coaxial cable,
connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) terminal on the rear of the DVD player to the
DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL) terminal of the Amplifier.
- Using the video signal cable(s), connect the VIDEO or COMPONENT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the VIDEO or COMPONENT terminals of your TV.
- Turn on the DVD player, TV, and Amplifier.
- Press the input select button of the Amplifier to select external input in order to hear sound
from the DVD player.
Refer to your Amplifier's user manual to set the Amplifier's audio input.
C. Connections to a TV Interlace / Progressive
- Using Component video cables (not included), connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PR, PB
and Y) jacks on the rear of the DVD player to the COMPONENT IN (PR, PB and Y) jacks of your
TV.
- Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
- Set the Video Output to I-SCAN/P-SCAN in the Display Setup menu. You can use the VIDEO
SEL. button to change the Video Output mode.
5
basic functions
To access the desired title when there is more than one in the disc. For example, if there is
more than one movie on a DVD, each movie will be identified.
Playing a Disc
Most DVD discs are recorded in chapters so that you can quickly find a specific passage.
Before Play
- Turn on your TV and set it to the correct Video Input by pressing TV/VIDEO button on the TV
remote control.
- If you connected an external Audio System, turn on your Audio System and set it to the correct
Audio Input.
After plugging in the player, the first time you press the DVD POWER button, this screen comes
up: If you want to select a language, press a π/† button then press ENTER (This screen will only
appear when you plug in the player for the first time.) If the language for the startup screen is not
set, the settings may change whenever you turn the power on or off. Therefore, make sure that
you select the language you want to use. Once you select a menu language, you can change it by
pressing the ■ /
button on the front panel of the unit for more than 5 seconds with no disc in
the unit. Then the SELECT MENU LANGUAGE window appears again where you can reset your
preferred language.
Using the Search and Skip Functions
During play, you can search quickly through a chapter or track, and use the skip function to jump
to the next selection.
Searching through a Chapter or Track
During play, press the SEARCH (
or
) button on the remote control for more than 1 second.
DVD
2X, 4X, 64X, 128X
VCD
4X, 8X
CD
2X, 4X, 8X
Note
- The speed marked in this function may be different from the actual playback speed.
- No sound is heard during search mode (Except CD).
Skipping Tracks
During play, press the SKIP (
or
) button.
- When playing a DVD, if you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the next chapter. If you
press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the beginning of the chapter. One more press makes it
move to the beginning of the previous chapter.
- When playing a VCD or a CD, if you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the next track. If
you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more press makes it
move to the beginning of the previous track.
- If a track exceeds 15 minutes when playing a VCD and you press the
button, it moves forward 5 minutes. If you press the
button, it moves backward 5 minutes.
Using the Display Function
When Playing a DVD/VCD/MPEG4
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item.
- When playing VCD, the Disc Menu may notwork.
3. Press the √/® buttons to make the desired setup and then press the ENTER button.
4. To make the screen disappear, press the INFO button.
6
Allows playback of the film from a desired time. You must enter the starting time as a reference.
The time search function does not operate on some disc.
Refers to the subtitle languages available in the disc. You will be able to choose the subtitle
languages or, if you prefer, turn them off from the screen. A DVD disc can have up to 32 different subtitles.
Enter and press the √/® buttons to access the desired Audio, Angle, Bookmark, EZ View
function and Zoom.
Refers to the language of the film soundtrack. In the example, the soundtrack is played in
English 5.1CH. A DVD disc can have up to eight different soundtracks. Some DVD discs are
have more angle function from any picture.
Bookmark function make you easily and quickly to find a track or chapter from DVD or CD.
The EZ View function is use for changing the aspect ratio in DVD.
The ZOOM function is use for Enlarge DVD Picture
Using the Disc and Title Menu
During stop mode of a DVD disc, press the DISC MENU/TITLE MENU button on the remote control.
Note
- The Disc Menu or Title Menu may not work. Depending on the disc.
- You can also use the Disc Menu, using the DISC MENU button on the remote control.
- Title Menu will only be displayed if there are at least two titles in the disc.
Repeat Play
Repeat the current track, chapter, title, a chosen section (A-B), or all of the disc.
When playing a DVD/VCD
Press the REPEAT buttons to select Chapter, Title, Track, Disc or Repeat : Off
- DVD repeats play by chapter or title, VCD repeat play by disc or track.
- Chapter : repeats the chapter that is playing.
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
- Disc : repeats the disc that is playing.
- Repeat : Off
- Track : repeats the track that is playing.
Using the A-B Repeat function
1. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
2. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B).
- To return to normal play, press the CANCEL button.
3. To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B then press the ENTER button until the display shows Repeat : Off
Note
- A-B REPEAT allow you to set point (B) directly after point (A) has been set.
- Depending on the disc, the Repeat function may not work.
- When playing VCD, the Disc Menu may not work.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Slow Play
This feature allows you to repeat scenes slowly containing sports, dancing, musical instruments
being played etc., so you can study them more closely.
When playing a DVD/VCD
1. During play, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
2. Press the SEARCH ( ) button to choose the play speed between 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 and 1/16 of
normal during PAUSE.
advanced functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View)
To play back using aspect ratio (DVD)
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut, then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the √/® buttons to select EZ View, then press the ENTER button.
- Each time you press the √/® button, the screen size changes. For graphics of the screen sizes
and the sequence in which the sizes change, see the next column.
If you are using a 16:9 TV
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- NORMAL Wide
- Screen Fit
- Zoom Fit
- VERTICAL FIT
If you are using a 4:3 TV
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- 4:3 Letter Box
- 4:3 Pan Scan
- Screen Fit
- Zoom Fit
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- NORMAL SCREEN
- Screen Fit
- Zoom Fit
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- NORMAL SCREEN
- Screen Fit
- Zoom Fit
Note
This function may behave differently depending on the type of disc.
Selecting the Audio Language
You can select a desired audio language quickly and easily with the AUDIO button.
Using the AUDIO/ √ button (DVD/VCD/MPEG4)
1. Press the AUDIO/√ button. The Audio changes when the button is pressed repeatedly. The
audio languages are represented by abbreviations.
Press Audio /√ button at remocon repeatedly to select the desired Audio on MPEG4 then press the
ENTER.
Note
- This function depends on audio languages are encoded on the disc and may not work.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 8 audio languages.
You can select a desired subtitle quickly and easily with the SUBTITLE (π) button.
Using the SUBTITLE / π button (DVD/MPEG4)
1. Press the SUBTITLE / π button. The subtitle languages are represented by abbreviations. The
subtitle changes when the button is pressed repeatedly.
Press SUBTITLE / π button at remocon repeatedly to select the desired subtitle language on a
MPEG4 then press the ENTER.
2. To remove the SUBTITLE icon, press the SUBTITLE / π button.
Note
- You have to change the desired subtitle in the Disc Menu, according to discs. Press the DISC
MENU button.
- This function depends on what subtitles are encoded on the disc and may not work on all DVDs.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 32 subtitle languages.
Changing the Camera Angle
When a DVD contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you can use the ANGLE function.
Using the ANGLE button (DVD)
If the disc contains multiple angles, the ANGLE appears on the screen.
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut. then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the √/® buttons to select Angle, then press the ENTER button.
4. Press the √/® buttons on the remote control to select the desired angle.
Note
- If the disc has only one angle, this feature won’t work. Currently, very few discs have this
feature.
- Depending on the disc, these functions may not work.
Using the Bookmark Function
This feature lets you bookmark sections of a DVD or VCD (Menu Off mode) so you can quickly find
them at a later time.
Using the Bookmark Function DVD/VCD
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut, then press the ENTER button
3. Press the √/® buttons to select Bookmark then press the ENTER button.
4. When you reach the scene you want to mark, press‑the ENTER button. You can bookmark up to
12 scenes at a time.
Note
- Depending on a disc, the Bookmark function may not work.
- When playing VCD, the Disc Menu may not work.
7
Recalling a Marked Scene
CD-R MP3/WMA file
1~3. The first 1~3 steps are the same as those for “Using the Bookmark Function”.
4.
Press the √/® buttons to select a marked scene.
5.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to skip to the marked scene.
When you record MP3 or WMA files on CD-R, please refer to the following.
- Your MP3 or WMA files should be ISO 9660 or JOLIET format.
ISO 9660 format and Joliet MP3 or WMA files are compatible with Microsoft's DOS and
Windows, and with Apple's Mac.This format is the most widely used.
- When naming your MP3 or WMA files, do not exceed 8 characters, and enter “.mp3, .wma”
as the file extension.
General name format : Title.mp3. or Title.wma. When composing your title, make sure that you
use 8 characters or less, have no spaces in the name, and avoid the use of special characters
including: (.,/,\,=,+).
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 128 Kbps when recording MP3 files.
Sound quality with MP3 files basically depends on the rate of compression/ decompression you
choose. Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion
to MP3 format, of at least 128 Kbps and up to 160 Kbps. However, choosing higher rates, like
Kbps or more, only rarely give better sound quality. Conversely, files with decompression rates
below 128 Kbps will not be played properly.
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 64Kbps when recording WMA files.
Sound quality with WMA files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you
choose. Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to
WMA format, of at least 64Kbps and up to Kbps. Conversely, files with decompression rates
below 64Kbps or over Kbps will not be played properly.
- Do not try recording copyright protected MP3 files.
Certain "secured" files are encrypted and code protected to prevent illegal copying. These files
are of the following types: Windows Media (registered trade mark of Microsoft Inc) and SDMITM
(registered trade mark of The SDMI Foundation). You cannot copy such files.
- Important:
The above recommendations cannot be taken as a guarantee that the DVD player will play MP3
recordings, or as an assurance of sound quality. You should note that certain technologies and
methods for MP3 file recording on CD-Rs prevent optimal playback of these files on your DVD
player (degraded sound quality and in some cases, inability of the player to read the files).
- This unit can play a maximum of 500 files and 500 folders per disc.
Clearing a Bookmark
1~3. The first 1~3 steps are the same as those for “Using the Bookmark Function”.
4.
Press the √/® buttons to select the bookmark number you want to delete.
5. Press the CANCEL button to delete a bookmark number.
Using the Zoom Function
- Using the Zoom Function (DVD/VCD) (DVD-C350,C350K)
1. During play, press the ZOOM button on the remote control.
- Using the Zoom Function (DVD/VCD) (DVD-C360,C450,C450K)
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut, then press the ENTER button
3. Press the √/® buttons to select Zoom, then press the ENTER button.
- During DVD/VCD play, press ENTER to zoom in 2X/3X/4X/ Normal in order.
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/CD Audio
CD Audio or discs with MP3/WMA/JPEG contain individual songs and/or pictures that can be organized into folders as shown below. They are similar to how you use
your computer to put files into different folders.
001/004
Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray. and the
tray closes.
Folder Selections
The folder can be selected in Stop or Play mode.
- To select the Parent Folder
Press the RETURN button to go to parent folder, or press the π/† buttons to select “..” and
press ENTER to go to the parent folder.
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
- Only one kind of file is played back when a disc or a folder contains both MP3 and WMA files.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a song file.
‑ Press ENTER to begin playback of the song file.
Repeat/Random playback
Press the REPEAT button to change the playback mode. There are four modes, such as Off,
Track, Folder and Random.
- Off: Normal Playback
- Track: Repeats the current song file.
- Folder: Repeats the song files which have the same extension in the current folder.
- Random: Song files which have the same extension will be played in random order.
To resume normal play, press the CANCEL button.
8
MPEG4 Playback
Playing Media File Using the USB Host feature
MPEG4 Play Function
MPEG4 is a compressed video format designed to deliver DVD quality video at lower data rates
and smaller file sizes. Types of MPEG4 files are DivX or Xvid. These files have an .avi extension.
AVI files are used to contain the audio and video data. This unit can only play AVI format files with
the “.avi” extension.
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select an avi file (DivX/XviD) and then press ENTER button.
Repeat playback
Press the REPEAT button to change playback mode. There are 3 modes, such as Track, Folder and Off.
- Track : repeats the track that is playing.
- Folder : repeats the AVI files which have the same extension in the current folder.
- Off
MPEG4 Function Description
Function
(
Skip
or
)
Search
(
or
)
Slow motion
Play
Description
During play, press the
utes.
or
(Only DVD-C360, C450,C450K)
You can enjoy the media files such as pictures, movies and tunes saved in an MP3 player, USB
memory or digital camera in high audio by connecting the storage device to the USB port of the
DVD Player.
Using the USB HOST feature
1. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a file in USB. Press ENTER to Open file.
Note
• Each time the USB button on the remote control is pressed, a frame of the USB device
selection will appear.
• “USB” appears on the display screen.
• When playing DVD or CD and USB inserted, “Press USB to select device” appear at the top
left corner for a moment.
• USB MENU screen appears on the TV screen and the saved file is played.
button, it moves forward or backward 5 min-
During play, press the SEARCH ( or
) button and press again to search at
a faster speed. Allows you to search at a faster speed in an AVI file. (2X, 4X, 8X)
Allows you to search at a slower speed in an AVI file. (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16)
- These functions may not work depending on MPEG4 file.
CD-R AVI file
This unit can play the following video compression formats within the AVI file format:
- DivX 3.11 contents
- DivX 4 contents (Based on MPEG-4 Simple Profile)
- DivX 5 contents (MPEG-4 simple profile plus additional features such as bi-directional frames.
Qpel and GMC are also supported.)
- XviD MPEG-4 compliant Contents.
This unit supports all resolutions up to maximum below.
DivX5
720 x 480 @30fps
720 x 576 @25fps
: Maximum bit rate :4Mbps
Note
• Some MPEG-4 files created on a personal computer may not be play back. That is why Codec
Type, Version and Higher resolution over specification is not supported.
• This unit supports CD-R/RW written in MPEG4 in accordance with the “ISO9660 format”.
Skip Forward/Back
During playback, press the (
/
) button.
• When there is more than one file, when you press the
• When there is more than one file, when you press the
button, the next file is selected.
button, the previous file is selected.
Safe USB Removal
To prevent damage to the memory stored in the USB device, perform safe removal before
disconnecting the USB cable.
- Press the STOP ( ) button
- Remove the USB cable.
Fast playback
To play back the disc at a faster speed, press (
/
) during playback.
• Each time you press either button, the playback speed will change as follows:
2x ➞ 4x ➞ 8x.
Compatible Devices
1. U
SB devices that support USB Mass Storage v1.0. (USB devices that operate as a removable
disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver installation.)
2. MP3 Player: Flash type MP3 player.
3. Digital camera: Cameras that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.
• Cameras that operate as a removable disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional
driver installation.
4. USB Flash Drive: Devices that support USB2.0 or USB1.1.
•You may experience a difference in playback quality when you connect a USB1.1 device.
5. USB card Reader: One slot USB card reader and Multi slot USB card reader
•Depending on the manufacturer. the USB card reader may not be supported.
• If you install multiple memory devices into a multi card reader, you may experience problems.
6. If you use a USB extension cable, the USB device might not be recognized.
• CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
• Digital Cameras that use PTP protocol or require additional program installation when connected
to a PC are not supported.
9
• A device using NTFS file system is not supported. (Only FAT 16/32 (File Allocation Table 16/32)
file system is supported.)
• Some MP3 players, when connected to this product,may not operate depending on the sector
size of their file system.
• The USB HOST function is not supported if a product that transfers media files by its
manufacturer-specific program is connected.
• Does not operate with Janus enabled MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) devices.
• The USB host function of this product does not support all USB devices.
CD Ripping (Only DVD-C360, C450, C450K)
This feature lets you to copy audio files from disc to USB device into MP3 format.
1. Open the dics tray. Place the Audio CD(CD DA) disc on the tray, and close the tray.
Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit.This screen will be displayed.
Press ENTER to select disc.
2. Press the RETURN button to display the ripping screen.
3. Press the π/† buttons, then press the ENTER button to select files for ripping.
- To deselect files, press ENTER button again.
4. Press the ® and † button to select START, then press the ENTER button begin ripping.
The Ripping menu contain the following buttons :
- Mode : Fast/Normal
- Bit Rate, press ENTER to change 128kbps ➔ 192kbps ➔ 256kbps ➔ 320kbps.
- Device selection, press ENTER to change between deviced (max 4).
- Select - Unselect, Press ENTER to change from Select all or Select none.
- Start ripping, press ENTER to start ripping process.
Note
- To return to CDDA screen, press the RETURN button again.
- When the CD ripping is in process the player will automatically begin playing.
- Only Audio CD (CD DA) discs can be ripped.
- Because the speed is 2.6x of normal speed. User is unable to play the CD DA through the rip
ping process.
Picture CD Playback
1. Select the desired folder.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Picture file in the clips menu and then press the ENTER button.
Note
- Press the STOP button to return to the clips menu.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, the unit displays the Photo directly, not the clips menu.
Rotation
- Each time the √/® button is pressed, the picture rotates 90 degrees clockwise.
- Each time the π button is pressed, the picture rotates 180 degrees.
- Each time the † button is pressed, the picture changes to the mirror appearance.
Zoom
- Each time the ENTER Button is pressed repeteadly, the picture is enlarged. zoom mode : 100%,
125%, 150%, 200%.
10
Slide show
- When you press the ENTER/PLAY at JPEG file,it will go to full screen mode and automaically slide
show.
Note
- Depending on a file size, the amount of time between each picture may be different from the manual.
- If you don’t press any button, the slide show will start automatically in about 10 seconds by
default.
CD-R JPEG Disc
- Only files with the “.jpg” and “.JPG” extensions can be played.
- If the disc has not been closed during the recording phase,(ie has not been finalised) it will take
longer to start playing and not all of the recorded files may be played.
- Only CD-R discs with JPEG files in ISO 9660 or Joliet format can be played.
- The name of the JPEG file may not be longer than 8 characters and should contain no blank
spaces or special characters (. / = +).
- Only a consecutively written multi-se ssion disc can be played.If there is a blank segment in the
multi-session disc, the disc can be played only up to the blank segment.
- A maximum of 500 images can be stored on a single CD.
- Kodak Picture CDs are recommended.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, only the JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played.
- Kodak Picture CD: The JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played automatically.
- Konica Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- Fuji Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- QSS Picture CD: The unit may not play QSS Picture CD.
- If the number of files in 1 Disc is over 500, only 500 JPEG files can be played.
- If the number of folders in 1 Disc is over 500, only JPEG files in 500 folders can be played
karaoke functions
Karaoke Functions
Operation Sequence
(Only DVD-C450K, C350K)
1. Connect the Mixed Audio Out terminals with the TV or Amplifier.
2. Connect Mic into Mic jack. When a MIC is connected, the karaoke functions can be used.
Mic Volume and Key Control
1. Playback the Karaoke Disc containing the wanted songs.
- Press the KARAOKE button to select Mic Volume then press KARAOKE button again to select
keycon.
2. Press the √/® buttons to change the desired tone.
Note
- If you hear feedback (squealing or howling) while using the karaoke feature, move the microphone away from the speakers or turn down the microphone volume or the speaker volume.
- When playing MP3, WMA, DTS and LPCM disc, the karaoke functions will not operate.
- When the MIC is connected, Digital Out does not work.
- The MIC sound outputs only from Analog Audio Out.
changing setup menu
Using the Setup Menu
The Setup menu lets you customize your DVD player by allowing you to select various language
preferences, set up a parental level, even adjust the player to the type of television screen you
have.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button on the remote control.Use the √/® buttons to select Setup, then press the † or ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to access the different features. Press the ® or ENTER button to
access the sub features.
3. To make the setup screen disappear after setting up, press the MENU button again.
Note
Depending on the disc, some Setup Menu selections may not work.
Setting Up the Language Features
If you set the player menu, disc menu, audio and subtitle language in advance, they will come up
automatically every time you watch a movie.
Using the Player Menu Language
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Language Setup Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired language, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note
- The language is selected and the screen returns to Language Setup menu.
- To make the setup menu disappear, press the MENU button.
- If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the original pre-recorded language is
selected.
- Select “Original” if you want the default soundrack language to be the original languange the
disc is recorded in.
- Select “Automatic” if you want the subtitle language to be the same as the language selected
as the audio language.
- Some discs may not contain the language you select : in that case the disc will use its original
languange setting.
Setting Up the Audio Options
Audio Options allows you to setup the audio device and sound status settings depending on the
audio system in use.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Audio Setup Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note : • Even when PCM Down sampling is Off
• Some discs will only output down sampled audio through the digital outputs.
• There is no analog audio output when you play a DTS sound disc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,
Inc.
Setting Up the Display Options
Display options enable you to set various video functions of the player.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Display Setup Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
• Consult your TV User’s Manual to findout if your TV supports Progressive Scan. If
Progressive Scan is supported, follow the TV User’s Manual regarding Progressive Scan
settings in the TV’s menu system.
• If Video Output is set incorrectly, the screen may be blocked.
• When the resolution is changed during playback, it may take a few seconds for a normal
image to appear.
Setting Up the Parental Control
The Parental Control function works in conjunction with DVDs that have been assigned a rating,
which helps you control the types of DVDs that your family watches. There are up to 8 rating levels
on a disc.
Setting Up the Rating Level / Changing the Password
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Parental Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select Parental/Password, then press the ® or ENTER button.
4. Press the π/† buttons to select Rating Level you want, then press the ENTER button.
e.g) Setting up in KID SAFE.
5. Enter your password. If this is the first time, enter 0000. Then, enter a new password. The new
password must be a number other than 0000 to activate the parental control function. Then, reenter the new password.
Note
ΠKID SAFE.
´ G (General Audiences) : All Ages Admited.
ˇ PG (Parental Guidance suggested) : Some material may not be suitable for young children.
¨ PG 13 (PG-13 Parents strongly cautioned) : Some material may be in appropriate for children
under 13.
ˆ PGR (Parental Guide Recommended) : These are not necessarily unsuitable for children, but
viewer discretion is advised, and parents and guardians are encouraged to supervise younger
viewer.
Ø R (Restricted) : Under 17 requires accompanying adult.
∏ NC17 (NC-17) : No one 17 and under admitted.
” ADULT.
- If you have forgotten your password, see “Forgot Password” in the Troubleshooting Guide.
11
Setting Up the DivX
Setting Up the DivX
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select DivX Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note : • Press Ok will make the registration code window disappear.
• DivX can only be accessed at stop mode.
reference
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service (troubleshooting), please check the following.
Problem
Action
The screen is
blocked
• Press the ■ / button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All settings will revert to the factory settings.
Forgot password.
• Press the ■ / button (on the panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All setings including the password will revert to the factory
settings. Don’t use this unless absolutely necessary.
Specifications
Power Requirements
Weight
Power Comsumption
General
12
Dimensions
AC 110-240 V ~ 50/60 Hz
DVD-C350,C350K,C360 : 1.2 Kg
DVD-C450,C450K : 1.5 Kg
6W
DVD-C350,C350K,C360 :
360mm (W) X 207mm(D) X 42mm (H)
DVD-C450,C450K :
430mm (W) X 207mm(D) X 42mm (H)
Operating Temperature
Range
+5°C to +35°C
Operating Humidity Range
10 % to 75 %
Video
Output
Component Video
Audio
Output
Frequency Response
Y : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pr : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pb : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
20Hz ~ 20kHz
memo
memo
memo
$POUBDU4".46/(803-%8*%&
*GZPVIBWFBOZRVFTUJPOTPSDPNNFOUTSFMBUJOHUP4BNTVOHQSPEVDUTQMFBTFDPOUBDUUIF4".46/(DVTUPNFSDBSFDFOUFS
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Area
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
Belgium
02 201 2418
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
U.K
Eire
Austria
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805-SAMSUNG (726-7864 å 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
02 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (å 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678), 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, å 0.07/min)
Switzerland
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
Russia
Kazakhstan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Ukraine
8-800-502-0000
Belarus
Moldova
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
Australia
New Zealand
China
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
Hong Kong
3698-4698
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Philippines
Middle East &
Africa
Contact Center 
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Nicaragua
Honduras
Costa Rica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Jamaica
Panama
Puerto Rico
Rep. Dominica
Trinidad & Tobago
Venezuela
Colombia
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
Turkey
South Africa
U.A.E
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ (French)
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/ee
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
AK68-01947A
‫‪DVD-C450K/C450‬‬
‫‪DVD-C360‬‬
‫‪DVD-C350K/C350‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دى وى دى‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭﻛﻨﻨﺪ دى وى دى‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﻫﺎ را ﺘﺟﺴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺴﺎ ﻤﺳﻭﻨگ‬
‫ﻔﻗﻁ ﺒﺎ ﺼﻣﺎﻨﺕ ﺴﺎﻡ ﺴﺭﻭﻴﺲ‬
‫‪www.samservice.com‬‬
‫ﺒﺎﺒﺕ ﺨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻴﻥ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻝ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺯ ﺸﻣﺎ ﻤﺗﺷﻛﺭﻴﻡ�‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻴﺎﻔﺕ ﺨﺩ ﻤﺎﺘﻲ ﺠﺎﻤﻊ ﺘﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﻨﺷﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻴﻧﺗﺭﻨﺗﻲ ﺯﻴﺭ ﺜﺑﺕ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﻫﺎ را ﲡﺴﻢ ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ‬
‫ﺒﺎﺒﺕ ﺨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻴﻥ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻝ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺯ ﺸﻣﺎ ﻤﺗﺷﻛﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻴﺎﻔﺕ ﺨﺩ ﻤﺎﺘﻲ ﺠﺎﻤﻊ ﺘﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﻨﺷﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻴﻧﺗﺭﻨﺗﻲ ﺯﻴﺭ ﺜﺑﺕ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ww.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫ﺴﺭﻭﻴﺱ‬
‫‪AK68-01947A‬‬
‫‪AK68-01753Q‬‬
‫ﻔﺎﺮﺴﻰ‬
‫ﺤﻗﻭﻕ ﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﻧﺩ ﻤﺤﺎ ﻔﻆﺕ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻔﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﻯ ﺤﻓﺎ ﻈﺕﺪﺭ ﺒﺭﺍﺒﺭ ﻨﺳﺧﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﺒﺎﻴﺩﺘﻭﺴﻂ ﺸﺭ ﻜﺕ‬
‫‪ Rovi‬ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪ ،‬ﻮﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺻﺎﺭﻑﺨﺎﻨﮕﻰ ﻮﺴﺎﻴﺭ‬
‫ﻤﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﻤﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺪﺭ ﻨﻇﺭ ﮔﺭ ﻔﺗﻪ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻤﮔﺭ ﺍﻴﻧﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﺸﺭﻜﺕ ‪ Rovi‬ﻤﺟﺎﺯ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ ‪.‬ﻤﻬﻧﺩﺳﻰ‬
‫ﻤﻌﻛﻭﺱ ﻴﺎ ﺒﺎﺯ ﻜﺭﺪﻥ ﻴﺎ ﺠﺩﺍ ﺴﺎﺯﻯ ﻤﻣﺑﻭﻉ ﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻈﺖ درﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮدارى‬
‫ﺑﺳﻳﺎ ﺭﻯ ﺍﺫ ﺪﻴﺳﻛﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺑﺎ ﺤﻓﺎﻆﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯﺭﻤﺯ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﻨﺩ ‪ ‬ﺒﺩ ﻳﻥ ﺨﺎ ﻃﺭ ‪،‬ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻴﺩ ﭙﺧﺵ‬
‫ﻜﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺭﺍﺒﻃﻭﺭ ﻤﺳﺗﻗﻳﻢ ﻨﻪ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻥ‪،‬ﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻨﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﻛﺎﻩ ﻮﻴﺩﺌﻭ‪ ،‬ﻮﺼﻝ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻮﺼﻝ ﻜﺭﺩﻥ ﺒﻪ ﻮﻴﺩﺌﻭ ﻤﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺪﻴﺳﻛﻬﺎﻯ دى وى دی‬
‫ﺤﻓﺎ ﻄﺕ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺒﺭﺍﺒﺭ ﻨﺳﺧﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻤﻧﺟﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺘﺻﻭ ﻴﺭ‬
‫ﺨﺭﺍﺏ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﺻﻭﻝ ﻤﺷﻣﻭﻝ ﺘﻛﻧﻭ ﻟﻭژﻯ ﻤﺣﺎ ﻔﻆﺕ ﺤﻕ ﻨﺷﺮ ﺍﺴﺕ‬
‫ﻜﻪ ﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﺜﺑﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﺗﺣﺩﻩﻭ ﺪﻴﮔﺭ ﻗﻭﺍﻨﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺤﻗﻭﻘﻰ ﻜﻪ ﻤﺎﻠﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺸﺭ ﻜﺕ ‪ Rovi‬ﻭﺴﺎﻴﺭ ﻤﺎﻟﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻮﺠﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﺘﺩﺭﻴﺟﻰ‬
‫"ﻤﺼﺭﻑ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﮔﻦ ﺒﺎﻴﺩ ﺘﻮﺠﻪ ﺩﺍﺸﺘﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﻨﺩ ﻜﻪ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﻰ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻮﻨﻬﺎﻯ ﭙﻴﺸﺭﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺒﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺒﻄﻮﺭ ﻜﺎﻤﻝ ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺭ ﻨﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﻧﺩ ﻮ ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺒﺎﻋﺚ ﺘﻮﻠﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺸﻜﺎﻞ ﺩﺭﭙﺧﺶﺘﺼﻮﻴﺮﺸﻮﻨﺩ‪،‬ﺩﺭﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﻤﺴﺎﺌﻝ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ‪ ۶٧۵‬ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﺘﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻴﺠﻰ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻪ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻮﺪ ﻜﻪ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ ﺍﺘﺼﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺒﻪ ﺨﺭﻮﻴﺠﻰ "ﻨﻭﻉ ﺍﺴﺘﺎﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ"‬
‫ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩ ﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺭﻯ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻮﻦ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺒﺎ ﻤﺩﻞ ﭘﺧٍﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻱ‬
‫‪".‬ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ‪ p۶٧۵‬ﺴﺌﻭﺍﻻﺘﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎﹰﺒﺎ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻴﺎﻦ ﺴﺎﻤﻮﺴﻮﻨگ‬
‫ﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺒﮔﻴﺭﻴﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻜﻨﺘﺭﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺠﻠﻭ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪DVD-C450‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪DVD-C450K‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪DVD-C360‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪DVD-C350K‬‬
‫‪DVD-C350‬‬
‫ﺠﻭﺍﺯ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ DivX ، DivX‬ﻤﺟﺎﺯ ﻮﻤﺎﺭﻜﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻤﺭﺒﻭﻄﻪ ﻋﻼﺌﻡ ﺘﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ DivXNetworks, Inc‬ﺒﻭﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁ ﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﺣﺖ ﺍﻤﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺪﺍﺮ ﺍﻯ ﮔﻭ ﺍﻫﻰ ‪ DivX‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎ ﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺤﺘﻴﺎﻄﻬﺎ ‪٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯﻋﻤﻭﻣﻰ ‪٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺸﺭﺡ ‪٣. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﮔﺷﺗﻰ ﺪﺮ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻞﺍﺯ ﺮﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ‪۴. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺘﺼﺎﻻﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻴک ﺍﺘﺼﺎﻞ ‪۵. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺪﻫﺎﻯﺍﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻳک ﺪﻴﺴک ‪۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﺍﺯﻋﻤﻠﻜﺭﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺴﺘﺟﻭﻭﭙﺭﺶ ‪۶. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﻜﺭﺪﻧﻤﺎﻴﺵ ‪۶. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک ﻭﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ ‪۶. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺮﻯ ‪۶. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ‪٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻛﺭﺪﻫﺎیﭙﻴﺷﺭﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺘﻨﻇﻳﻢ ﻛﺭﺪﻦ ﺪﺮﺟﻪ ﺑﺯﺮ ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ )ﻧﻤﺎﻯ‪٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . (EZ‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺭﺪﻦ ﺯﻧﺎﻦ ﺼﺪﺍ ‪٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺭﺪﻦ ﺯﻧﺎﻦﺯﻴﺮﻧﻭﻴﺲ ‪٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮﺪﺍﺪﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﻪ ﺪﻭﺭﺒﻳﻦ ‪٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻥ ﺍﺯﻋﻤﻠﻛﺮﺪ ﻨﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺫﺍﺮﻯ ‪٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺩﻦﺍﺯﻋﻣﻠﻜﺭﺪﺑﺯﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ ‪٨. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻤﻨﻭﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺖ ‪٨. . . . . . . . . . . MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺪﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ‪٨. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ‪٨. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP3/WMA/CD‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ‪٩. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG4‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺴﺎﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺖ‬
‫‪) USB Host‬ﻤﻴﺯﺑﺎﻦ‪) (USB‬ﻔﻗﻁ ‪٩. . . (DVD-C450K,C450,C360‬‬
‫ﺘﻬﻳﻪ ﺴﻲﺩﻱ )ﻔﻗﻁ ‪١٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . (DVD-C450K,C450,C360‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻛﺲ ‪١٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻜﺎﺮﻜﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪Karaoke‬‬
‫ﻜﺎﺮﻜﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪) Karaoke‬ﻔﻗﻁ ‪١٠. . . . . . (DVD-C450K,C350K‬‬
‫ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺭﺪﺍﺪﻥ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﺘﻨﻇﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﺘﻨﻇﻳﻢ ‪١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﻇﻳﻢ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ‪١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﻇﻳﻢ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﮔﺯﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺼﺪﺍ ‪١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﻇﻳﻢ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﮔﺯﻴﻨﻪﻫﺎﻯ ﻨﻤﺎﻴﺶ ‪١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﻇﻳﻢ ﻜﺮﺪﻦﻜﻧﺗﺭﻞ ﻭﺍﻠﺪﻳﻦ ‪١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up the DivX‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺘﻘﺎﻱ ﺴﻔﺖ ﺍﻔﺯﺪﺍﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺑﻰ ‪١٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻤﺸﺨﺻﺎﺖ ‪١٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫وﮋﮔﻬﺎى ﻋﻤﻮ ﻣۑ‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ ‪(DVD-C450K,C450,C360‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎبﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬
‫ ”ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﺘﺪﺮﻳﺟﻰ“ ﭙﻴﺴﺖ ؟‬‫ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﺘﺪﺮﻴﺟﻰ ﻨﺴﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺮﻭﺵ ﺧﺭﻭﺠﻰ ﺁﻤﻳﺧﺗﻪ ﺪﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺭ ﺧﻃﻭﻄ ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ� ﺭﻭﺶ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻰ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺘﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﻛﻳﻔﻴﺖ ﺘﺼﻭﻴﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺭﻭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺭﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ�‬
‫ﻤﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻨﻣﻭﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺘﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺎﺩﻩ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﺘﺻﺎﻝ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺒﻪ ﺘﻟﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎ ﻴﺮﺪﺳﺗﮔﺎ‬
‫ﺮﺍ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﺑﻝ ﺍﺯﻭﺼﻝ ﻜﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻜﺗﺩهدىوىدى‬
‫ ﻘﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺼﻝ ﻜﺭﺪﻥ ﻴﺎ ﺠﺩﺍ ﻜﺭﺩﻥ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻨﻪ ﻜﺎﺒﻟﻰ ‪،‬ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻭ ﺴﺎﻴﺭ ﺪﺴﺗﻛﺎﻫﻬﺎﻯ ﺭﺍﺨﺎ ﻤﻭﺵ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻯﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭﺍﺠﺯﺍﺀ ﺍﻀﺎﻔﻰ )ﺍﺯ ﻘﺑﻳﻝ ﺘﻟﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻥ( ﺒﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻮﺼﻝ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻂﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺒﻳﺷﺗﺭﺩﺭﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺠﺯﺍﺀ ﺨﺎﺹ ﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺸﻭﺩ�‬‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .A‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﺰﻮن )وﺪﺋﻮ(‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﻴﺩ ﺋﻭﻳﻰ ‪ /‬ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ‪) ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺯﻭ ﺴﻔﻴﺪ( ‪)/AUDIO OUT‬ﺯﺭﺩ( ‪ VIDEO‬ﺪﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ‬‫ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺘﺭﻤﻴﻧﺎ ﻠﻬﺎﻯ )ﻗﺭﻣﺰﻭ ﺴﻔﻴﺩ( ‪)/AUDIO IN‬ﺯﺭﺩ( ‪ VIDEO‬ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺨﻭﺪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻛﻨﻧﺪ ﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻭﺗﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺧﻭﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻳﺩ�‬‫ ﮔﺯ ﻴﻨﺷﮕﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺪﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻥ‬‫ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩﺘﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻛﻪ ﺴﻴﮔﻨﺎﻞ ﻭﻴﺪﺋﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺤﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺼﻔﻪ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺎﻦ ﺸﻭﺩ�‬
‫ﻓﺎﺮ ‪DTS‬ﺩﺍﻟﺒﻰ ﺩﺠﺘﺎﻝ ﻴﺎ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗۑ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻮاﻛﺴﻴﺎل‬
‫آﺑﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻜﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﻯ ﺪﺭ ﻨﺯﺩﻴﻛﻴﻄﺫ ﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺭﻖ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ ﻣﻤﻛﻥ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺴﺭﻭﺻﺪﺍﺘﻭﻠﻳﺪ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺁﻣﭙﻟﻰ ﻓﺎﻴﺮﻯ ﺮﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻃﻔﺎ� ﺑﻪ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻞ ﺁﻣﭙﻟﻰ ﻔﺎﻳﺮﻣﺮﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻜﻧﻳﺪ�‬‫ ﺸﻣﺎﺮﻩ ﻮ ﻤﻴﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺒﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺰﻴﻮﻥ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺗﻓﺎﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ‪ .‬ﻟﻓﺎ�ﺒﻪ ﺪﻓﺗﺮﭼﻪ ﺮﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻯ‬‫ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺮ ﺗﻟﻭﻳﺯﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ�‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺘﺭﻤﻴﻨﺎﻞ ﻭﺮﻭﺩﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﻮﺪ ﺍﺴﺕ ‪،‬ﺁﻥ ﺮﺍﺒﻪ ﺘﺭﻤﻳﻤﻨﺎﻞ )‪) (AUDIO OUT‬ﭽﭗ( )ﺴﻔﻴﺪ(‬‫ﺪﺭ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻮﺻﻞ ﻧﻛﻳﺩ�‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖﻛﻠﺒﻞ‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ آﺑﻰ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫زرد‬
‫ﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳۑﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗۑ‬
‫زرد‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ .B‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ )آﻣﭙﻠۑﻓﺎﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل داﻟﺒﻰ دﻳﺠﺘﺎل ‪ MPEG2‬ﻳﺎآﻣﭙﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﻳﺮ ‪(DTS‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺻﻭﺗﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺘﺮﻣﻳﻨﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﻘﺮﻤﺯﻭ ﺴﻔﻳﺪ(‬‫ﺪﺮ ﭙﺷﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺘﺭ ﻤﻴﻧﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﻘﺮﻤﺯﻭ ﺴﻔﻳﺪ( ﺁﻤﭘﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫ )ﺍﺮﺍﺌﻪ ﻨﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺴﺖ( ﺍﺴﺘﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻤﻴﻨﺎﻞ )‪ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT(COAXIAL‬ﺪﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺫﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ‬‫ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻤﻴﻨﺎﻞ )‪ DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL‬ﺁﻤﭘﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻝ )ﻫﺎﻯ( ﺴﻴﮔﻧﺎﻞ ﻭﻴﺪﺋﻭ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻴﺎﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ، VIDEO‬ﺪﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ‬‫ﻛﻨﻧﺫﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺮﺍﺑﻪ ﭙﺎﻴﺎﻨﻪ ‪ ، VIDEO‬ﺪﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻨﺘﺎﻦ ﺑﻄﻭﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺘﻭﺿﻴﺢ ﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻯﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻭ ﺁﻤﭙﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬‫ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ external input‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺪﻯ ﺁﭙﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻦﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻧﻭﻴﺪ�‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺘﻨﻆﻴﻢ ﺨﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺁﻤﭙﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻯ ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺮ ﺁﻤﭘﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﻴﺮ ﺧﻭﺪ ﺮﺟﻭﻉ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ .C‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﺰﻮن )آﻣﻴﺨﺘﻪ‪/‬ﺗﺪرﺠۑ (‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻭﻳﺩﺌﻭ )ﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻨﺷﺪﻩ( ‪ ،‬ﭙﺎﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ COMPONENT OUT‬ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭙﺧﺶ‬‫ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺒﻪ ﭙﺎﻴﺎﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ COMPONENT IN‬ﺪﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻧﺘﺎﻦ ﻤﺘﺻﻝ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺘﺮﻤﻴﻧﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﻗﺮﻣﺯﻭﺴﻓﻴﺪ( ﺪﺭ ﭘﺷﺖ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻦﻨﺩﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ‬‫ﺘﺮﻣﻴﻧﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﻗﺭﻤﺯﻭﺴﻔﻴﺩ( ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ� ﭙﺧﺵ ﻛﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻦ ﺮﺍ ﺮﻭﺸﻦ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﮔﺯﻴﻨﺸﮕﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺍﺑﺮ ﺮﻭﻯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻥ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻴﻧﻛﻪ ﺴﻳﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬‫ﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﺯ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻛﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻓﺤﻪ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬
‫‪ -‬ﺪﺭ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ‪ Video Output ، Display Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ )‪ Component (I-SCAN/P-SCAN‬ﺘﻨﻇﻴﻡ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺴﻴﻧﻰ ﺪﻴﺴک‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴک ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﺍﻴﻨﺠﺎ ﻘﺭﺍﺮ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ�‬
‫‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ‬
‫‪(DVD-C450K,C450,C360‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺮﺑﻳﻦ ﻋﻜﺎﺴﻲ ﺪﻴﺟﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻛﺎﺮﺖ ﺤﺎﻓﻇﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺮﺖ ﺨﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺴﺎﻴﺮ ﺘﺠﻬﻳﺯﺍﺖ ﺫﺨﻳﺭﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺭﺪﺍﺷﺘﻧﻲ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﻨﻣﺎﻳﺷﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻨﺷﺎﻨﮔﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻳﺎﺖ ﺪﺮ ﺍﻳﻧﺠﺎ ﻨﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺷﻭﻨﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺑﺎﺯ ‪ /‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ /‬ﺘﻮﻗﻒ ) (‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺭﺩﻥ ﻴﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺴﻴﻧﻰ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �۴‬ﺘﻮﻗﻒ )■()ﻔﻗﻁ ‪(DVD-C450K,C450‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺴﻴﻧﻰ ﺪﻴﺴک‬
‫‪ �۵‬ﭙﺧﺶ ‪ /‬ﻤﻛﺙ ) (‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺮﺍﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻴﺎ ﻣﻛﺚ ﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٧‬ﻣﻳﺰﺑﺎﻥ ‪(USB Host ) USB‬‬
‫‪DVD-C350K‬‬
‫‪DVD-C350‬‬
‫‪MIC �٨‬‬
‫‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ‬
‫‪(DVD-C450K,C350K‬‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ‬
‫‪(DVD-C450K‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﺮاي ﻛرﻛﺮدهﺎي ‪�Karaoke‬‬
‫‪MICROPHONE VOLUME �٩‬‬
‫از ﺁن ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪي ﺻﺪاي ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ آﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ دآﻤﻪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬دىوىدى‬
‫ﺭﻭﺸﻦ ﻴﺎ ﺧﺎﻤﻭﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ�‬
‫ﺑﺭﻖ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﻴک ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﻔﺻﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺘﺮﺍک ﻴﺎ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﻆﺎﻫﺭﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺩ� ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﺩﻴﺴک‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪BOOKMARK‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺟﻠﻭ‪/‬ﻋﻘﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺪﺭ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺍﻨﺟﺎﻢ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫(‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪)STOP‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﻔﺼﻞ ﻴﺎ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺍﺯ ﺁﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭙﺮﺶ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻭی ﭼﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺪ ﻩ ﺪﻯﻭﻯﺪﻯ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪π/†,√/® ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳک ﺴﻭﻴﭻ ﺿﺎﻤﻥ ﻋﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(√) AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﺴﺘﺮﺴﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻛﺭ ﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺪﺭ ﻴک ﺪﻳﺴک ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ�‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺤﺎﻠﺖ ﺩﻴﺴک‬
‫ﻔﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻴﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪( ) OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺭﺪﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺴﻳﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴک ﺁﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪REPEAT A-B‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻛﺎﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪A-B‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺪﻭﺑﺎ ﺭﻩ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻛﻧﻳﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪VIDEO SEL.‬‬
‫ﻔﺭﻤﺖ ﺨﺭﻭﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺘﺼﻭﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺩ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪( ) PLAY/PAUSE‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻛﺚ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(π) SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻭﻯ ﻘﺑﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻤﯽﮔﺭﺩﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(®) TITLE MENU‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪KARAOKE‬‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ ‪(DVD-C450K‬‬
‫از ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدﻫﺎي ‪ Karaoke‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪CANCEL‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﭘﺎک ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻤﻨﻭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻴﺸﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺖ ﺪﺭ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﮔﺸﻨﺘﻰ در ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪ �۶‬ﺍﺴﻧﺘﺪ ﺑﺎﻯ ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ) (‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺶ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺮﻭﺸﻦ‪/‬ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺵ ﻤﻲﺷﻭﺪ�‬
‫‪DVD-C450K‬‬
‫‪DVD-C450‬‬
‫‪DVD-C360‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬دىوىدى‬
‫ﺭﻭﺸﻦ ﻴﺎ ﺧﺎﻤﻭﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ�‬
‫ﺑﺭﻖ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﻴک ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﻔﺻﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺘﺮﺍک ﻴﺎ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﻆﺎﻫﺭﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺩ� ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﺩﻴﺴک‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪BOOKMARK‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪)STOP‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﻔﺼﻞ ﻴﺎ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺍﺯ ﺁﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭙﺮﺶ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻭی ﭼﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺪ ﻩ ﺪﻯﻭﻯﺪﻯ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪π/†,√/® ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳک ﺴﻭﻴﭻ ﺿﺎﻤﻥ ﻋﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(√) AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﺴﺘﺮﺴﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻛﺭ ﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺪﺭ ﻴک ﺪﻳﺴک ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺤﺎﻠﺖ ﺩﻴﺴک‬
‫ﻔﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻴﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪) OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺭﺪﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺴﻳﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺴک ﺁﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪REPEAT A-B‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻛﺎﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪A-B‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺪﻭﺑﺎ ﺭﻩ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻛﻧﻳﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ZOOM‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪VIDEO SEL.‬‬
‫ﻔﺭﻤﺖ ﺨﺭﻭﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺘﺼﻭﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺩ�‬
‫(‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺟﻠﻭ‪/‬ﻋﻘﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺪﺭ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺍﻨﺟﺎﻢ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪( ) PLAY/PAUSE‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻛﺚ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(π) SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻭﻯ ﻘﺑﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻤﯽﮔﺭﺩﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(®) TITLE MENU‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪CANCEL‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﭘﺎک ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻤﻨﻭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﻴﺸﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺖ ﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪KARAOKE‬‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ ‪(DVD-C350K‬‬
‫از ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدﻫﺎي ‪ Karaoke‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫(‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن زﻧﺎن زﺮ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻭﺮﺯﺷﻰ‪ ،‬ﺭﻘﺹ‪ ،‬ﺴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﭙﺨﺵ ﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻃﻭﺮ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺘﺎ ﺑﺘﻭﺍﻨﻴﺩ ﺁﻨﺎﻦ ﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻨﺯﺩﻴک ﺑﺮﺭﺴﻰ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ دىوىدى )‪(DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ) ( ‪ SEARCH‬ﺭﺍ ﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻤﻨﺎﻦ ‪ ۴١/١،x٨/١،x۴/١،x٢/١‬ﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻤﻌﻤﻭﻠﻰ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻨﮔﺎﻩ ﺪﺍﺭﻴﺪ ﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﺤﻳﻦ ﺤﺎﻠﺖ ‪ PAUSE‬ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﭘﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ اﺷﺘﻔﺎده ازدرﺟ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ )دى وى دى(‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﻜﻧﺘﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ†‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺐ ﻤﻳﺎﻨﺑﺭ )‪ (Shortcut‬ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺐ ‪ EZ View‬ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﻫﺭ ﺒﺎﺭ ﻜﻪ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭ‪١‬ﻔﺷﺎﺭﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻨﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ﺘﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺩ�‬‫ﺒﺮ ﺍﻯ ﺍﻄﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭ ﺍﻓﻴﮏ ﺍﻨﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ﻭﻓﻬﺭﺴﺕ ﺗﺭ ﺗﻳﺏ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻨﺩﺍﺯﮦ ﺁﻦ ‪،‬ﺒﻪ ﺴﺗﻭﻦ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﺭ‪١‬ﺠﻌﻪ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاى دﺴﻬﺎى داراى درﺟ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ ‪ :‬‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﺾ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه زوم‬‫ﺑﺮاى دﺴﻬﺎى داراى درﺟ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﺮض ﻋﺎدى‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه زوم‬‫‪ -‬اﻧﺪازه ﻋﻤﻮدى‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﺪ )‪(DVD/MPEG4) SUBTITLE (π‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺮﺍﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺪ� ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (π) SUBTITLE‬ﺯﺒﺎﻧﻬﺎﻯ ﺼﺩﺍ ﺒﺼﻭﺮﺕ ﻣﺨﻓﻑ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺶ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻨﺪ ﻴﺎ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ�‬
‫ ﺰﻴﺮﻨﻭﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﻤﻜﺭﺮ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺪ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ�‬‫‪ �٢‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺎک ﻛﺮﺩﻦ ﺸﻤﺎﻴﻞ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ (π) SUBTITLE‬ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‬
‫ ﺒﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻯﺪ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺴﺗﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺯﻴﺭﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﻤﻭﺭﺪ ﻧﻈﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ‪) DISC MENU‬ﻣﻧﻮﻯ ﺩﻴﺴک( ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺭ ﺩﻫﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DISC MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬‫ ﺍﻴﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻜﺭﺪ ﺒﻪ ﺯﻴﺮﻨﻮﻴﺲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻯﺪﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﻣﺯﻤﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ ﻮ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﻰ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻧﺪ�‬‫‪ -‬ﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺩﻯﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻜﺛﺭ ﺩﺍﺮﺍﻯ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ�‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﻛﺮدن درﺟ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ )ﻧﻤﺎى ‪(EZ‬‬
‫اﮔﺮﺷﻤﺎ از ﺗﻠﻮﺰﻮن ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺸﻤﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺠﺴﺎﺪﮔﻴﺰﺑﺎﻦ ﺯﻴﺮ ﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﺪﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫اﮔﺮﺷﻤﺎ از ﺗﻠﻮﺰﻮن ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎد ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاى دﺴﻬﺎى داراى درﺟ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ ‪ :‬‬
‫ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﭘﺴﺖ ‪:‬‬‫ﭘﻦ‪-‬اﺳﻜﻦ ‪:‬‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه زوم‬‫ﺑﺮاى دﺴﻬﺎى داراى درﺟ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺎدى‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫‪ -‬اﻧﺪازه زوم‬
‫ﺘﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻣﻠﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺴﺎﺲ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺑﻄﻭﺮ ﺑﻄﻭﺮ ﻤﺗﻓﺎﻭﺖ ﻋﻤﻝ ﻛﻧﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن زﻧﺎن ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻴک ﺯﻨﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﺪﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻭ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از دﻛﻤﺪ )√( ‪(DVD/VCD/MPEG4) AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺪﻜﻣﻪ )√( ‪ AUDIO‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ� ‪ Audio‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﺑﻄﻭﺮ ﻤﻜﺭﺭ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﺷﻭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻨﺪ�‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻴﺪﺌﻭﻴﻰ ﻳﺎ ﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻤﻴﺎﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﺮﻳﻭ ‪،‬ﺭﺍﺴﺖ ﻴﺎ ﭼﭗ ﻴﻜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ�‬‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻤﻭﺭﺪ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺪﺭ ﻴک ‪ MPEG4‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ )√( ‪ AUDIO‬ﺮﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬‫ﺘﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﺴﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺮﺪ ﻭ ﻤﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻜﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻨﺪ�‬‫‪ -‬ﻴک ﺪﻴﺴک ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺤﺩﺍﻜﺜﺮ ‪ ٨‬ﺰﺑﺎﻦ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻤﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬
‫ﺗﻐﺮ دادن زاوﻳ دورﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮔﺎ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺪﻯﻭﻯﺪﻯ ﺤﺎﻮﻯ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎﻯ ﺩﻴﺪ ﻣﺧﺗﻟﻒ ﺍﺰ ﻴک ﺼﺤﻧﻪ ﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ ،‬ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻟﻜﺭﺪ ‪ ANGLE‬ﺍﺴﺘﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از دﻛﻤﺪ ‪(DVD) ANGLE‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺣﺎﻮﻯ ﺯﻮﺍﻴﺎﻱ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻓﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ‪ ANGLE ،‬ﺭﻮﻯ ﺻﻓﺣﻪ ﻅﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺸﻭﺪ�‬
‫ ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ�‬‫ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻤﻳﺎﻨﺑﺭ )‪ (Shortcut‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺱ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬‫ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ‪ ANGLE‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺱ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻮض ﻜﺮدن ﻧﻮاي دﻟﺨﻮاﻩ دﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ®‪ √/‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻴﺴک ﻣﻗﻂ ﺪﺍﺮﺍﻯ ﻴک ﺯﺍﻮﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺩ ‪،‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﻮﻴﮋﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﺧﻮ ﺍﻫﺩ ﻛﺭﺩ�‬‫‪ -‬ﺪﺭ ﺤﺎﻞ ﺤﺎﻀﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺘﻌﺩﺍﺩﻯ ﻛﻤﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻴﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺪﺍﺮﺍﻯ ﺢﻴﻦ ﻭﻴژ ﮔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺴﻨﺩ�‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬارى‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﻭﻴژﮔﻰ ﺒﻪﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺧﺷﻰﺍﺯ ﻴک ﺪﻯﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﻴﺎﺴﻰ ﺩﻯﻭﻴﺪﺋﻮﻯ )ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪(Menu Off‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻨﻪ ﮔﺬﺭﻯ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺩ ﺒﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺪﺮ ﺁﻴﻧﺩﻩ ﭙﻴﺪﺍ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ‪(DVD/VCD) Bookmark‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻤﻳﺎﻨﺑﺭ )‪ (Shortcut‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺱ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻋﻼ ﻤﺕ ﺯﺪﻥ )‪ (Bookmark‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺱ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺣﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺍﻴﺩ ﻋﻼﺗﮔﺫﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﻭﻧﺪ ﺭﺴﻴﺪﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺮﺍﺍﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢‬ﺼﺣﻨﻪ ﺭﺍﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺪﺭﻫﺭﺑﺎﺮ ﻋﻼﻤﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﻧﻤﻭﺪ�‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﻫﻧﮔﺎ ﻤﻳﻛﻪ ‪ Disc Menu ، VCD‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻧﺪ‬‫ ﺑﺎﺗﻭﺠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻟﻜﺭﺪ ‪ Bookmark‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻧﺪ‬‫ﻓﺮاﺧﻮاﻧﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪ �٣-١‬ﺴﻪ ﻣﺭﺤﻟﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﻤﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺤﻞ ‪ ″‬ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻜﺮﺩﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻟﻜﺮﺩ ‪�″Bookmark‬‬
‫‪ �۴‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻴک ﺻﺣﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻤﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �۵‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ) ( ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺮﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺮﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺣﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻤﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى اﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺪﺴﺗﺭﺴﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻠﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺪﺮ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳک ﻋﻧﻮﺍﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺴک ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺒﺎﺷﺩ‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻣﺛﺎﻞ ‪،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻴک ﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻯﻮﻯﺩﻯ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪،‬ﻫﺭ ﻓﻴﻟﻢ ﺸﻧﺎﺴﺎﻴﻰ ﻭﺍﻫﺩ‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﺭﺪﻥ ﻴک ﺪﻴﺴک‬
‫ﺑﻴﺗﺭ ﺪﻴﺴﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻯﻭﻯﺪﻯ ﺑﺼﻭﺮﺕ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺿﺒﻃﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺗﻮﻨﻴﺩ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﻗﺴﻣﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻭﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭙﻴﺩﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺩ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﺼﻮﺗﻰ(‬
‫ﻗﺒﻝ ﺍﺯﭙﺧﺶ‬
‫ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻦ ﺨﻭﺪﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺪﻩ ﻭﺁ ﻧﺭﺍﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ‪) Video Input‬ﻭﺮﻭﺩﻱ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﺩﻭﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺘﻧﻆﻳﻢ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮﺴﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺧﺎﺮﺟﻰ ﺮﺍﻭﺼﻝ ﻛﺭﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺴﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﺸﻦ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺁﻦ ﺮﺍﺭﻭﻯﻭﺭﻭﺪﻯ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺽﺤﻴﺢ ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻢ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻔﻴﻟﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻦ ﺩﻠﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺩ �ﺸﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻴﺩ ﺯﻤﺎﻦ ﺸﺭﻭﻉﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﻮﺭﺍﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ �ﻋﻤﻟﻛﺮﺪ ﺟﺴﺗﺠﻭﻯ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺿﻰ ﺩﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻧﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺩ‬
‫ﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﻭﺼﻝ ﻛﺮﺪﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻜﻧﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻴﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺭﻣﻰ ﺷﻭﺪ � ﺍﮔﺮﻣﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺰﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻗﻄ ﺰﻤﺎﻧﻰ ﻆﺎﻫﺭﻣﻰ ﺷﻭﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻠﻴﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺮ ﭘﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﺭﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ (.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﺘﻧﻇﻴﻢ ﺘﻌﻳﻴﻦ ﻨﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺸﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺘﻨﻇﻴﻤﺎﺖ ﻣﻤﻛﻦﺍﺴﺖ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﺖ ﻴﺎ ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺶ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺮﻜﻧﻨﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺑﺭﺍﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻤﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺸﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺭﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻘﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﻤﻧﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﺭﺪﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺪﻦ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ■ /‬ﺪﺭ ﭙﺎﻧﻝ ﺠﻠﻭﻯ ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻤﺩﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺜﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﻳﻛﻪ ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻰ ﺪﺭ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ � ﺴﭙﺲ ﭙﻧﺠﺮﻩ ‪ SELECT MENU LANGUAGE‬ﺪﻭﺑﺎﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺸﻭﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻳﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻠﺨﻭ ﺍﻩ ﺨﻭﺪ ﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻨﺷﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮوﭘﺰش‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻳک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ Title Menu / Disc Menu‬ﺪﺭ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺘﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺪﻳﺴک ‪ Title Menu / Disc Menu ،‬ﻣﻤﻛﻥ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻛﻧﺪ‬‫ ﺸﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﭼﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Disc Menu‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DISC MENU‬ﺪﺭ ﻜﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻳﺩ�‬‫‪ Title Menu -‬ﻓﻘﻃ ﺪﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪﻛﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻞﺪﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﺭﺪ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺠﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺪ�‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﺮدن در ﻣﺎن ﻚ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻳﺎﺑﺮاك‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ )‬
‫( ‪ SEARCH‬ﺭﺍ ﺪﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺮ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‪ ١‬ﺜﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺪﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻣﻠﻜﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻛﻥ‬‫ﺍﺴﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻰ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺘﻔﺎﻭﺖ ﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ�‬
‫‪ -‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻴﻰﺪﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺤﺎﻠﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺟﻭ ﺑﮔﻭﺶ ﻨﺨﻭ ﺍﻫﺩ ﺭﺴﻴﺪ )ﺑﺠﺯ ﺳﻰ ﺪﻯ(�‬
‫ﺪﻯﻭﻯﺪﻯ‬
‫‪x١٢٨،x۶۴،x۴،x٢‬‬
‫ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻴﺪﺌﻭﻳﻰ‬
‫‪x٨،x۴‬‬
‫ﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ‬
‫‪x٨،x۴،x٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺮش ﻛﺮدن از ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫ﻴﺎ‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫( ‪ SKIP‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺒﻪ ﻔﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺪ �ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻴک ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ )‬‫( ‪ SKIP‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺩﺍﻯ ﻔﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻤﻰ ﺭﻭﺩ� ﻴک ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﻴﮔﺮ ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻯ‬
‫)‬
‫ﻔﺼﻞ ﻘﺑﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺭﺪ�‬
‫( ‪ SKIP‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺧﺶ ‪ VCD‬ﻳﺎ ﻳک ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ )‬‫( ‪ SKIP‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻯ ﺗﺭﺍک ﻤﻰ ﺭﻭﺩ� ﻴک‬
‫ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺪ� ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ )‬
‫ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻴﮔﺭ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺩﺍﻯ ﺘﺭﺍک ﻘﺒﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺭﺪ�‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺪﺭﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻴﺪ ﺋﻭﻴﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١۵‬ﺪﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺪﻭ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ‬‫ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎ ﻩ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻘﺏ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺪ�‬
‫ﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ ۵‬ﺪﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺠﻠﻭ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺪ� ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺪﺭ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﺩﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻣﻳﻜﻪ ‪ Disc Menu،VCD‬ﻣﻤﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻨﺪ�‬‫‪ �٣‬ﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺘﻧﻆﻴﻢ ﺪﻠﺧﻭ ﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺴﭙﺲ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �۴‬ﻓﺻﻝ ﻴﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺍ ﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻤﺤﻭ ﻛﺮﺪﻥ ﺻﻓﺤﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﻤﺟﺪﺪﺍ ﺍﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺸﻭﻴﺩﻭ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺮﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺪﺳﺗﺭ ﺴﻰﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻟﻛﺭﺪﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﻨﻇﺭ ﻨﻣﺎﻯ ‪ ،EZ‬ﺼﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺰﺍﻭﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻨﺷﺎﻨﻪ ﻮﺯﻭﻡ ﻔﺷﺎﺭﺪﻫﻳﺩ�‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﺼﻭﺗﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺸﻮﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻤﺛﺎﻞ‪،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﺗﺭﺍک ﺼﻭﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺰﺑﺎﻦ ﺍﻧﮔﻠﻴﺴﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺕ ‪ ۵/١‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻞ ﻀﺑﻁ ﻣﻰ ﺸﻭﺩ�‬
‫ﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺩﻯﻮﻯﺩﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺸﺕ ﺗﺭﺍک ﺼﻮﺗﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﻟﻑ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ‪ AC3، MP3‬ﻮ ‪ WMA‬ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﺷﻭﺩ‪(DivX).‬‬
‫ﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﻪ ﺑﻳﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺩ ﺭﺑﺭﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻴﺴﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺯﻫﺮ ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻛﻦ ﺑﻴﺷﺘﺮ ﺍﺴﺖ�‬
‫ﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Bookmark‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎ ﺍﻤﻜﺎﻦ ﻤﻲ ﺪﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﻫﺭﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻴﺎ ﻔﺻﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺁﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﺪﺭ ‪ DVD‬ﻴﺎ ‪ VCD‬ﭙﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ )‪.(Menu Off‬‬
‫ﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ EZ View‬ﻨﺴﺑﺖ ﺑﺯﺮ ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺮﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺑﺴﺎﺪﮔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺰﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺘﻠﻭﻳﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺘﻨﻇﻴﻢ ﻛﺭﺪ ﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Zoom‬ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺭﺪﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺪﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﺯﺭگ ﻤﻲ ﻛﻧﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻣﻨﻮى دﻳﺴﻚ وﻋﻨﻮان‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﺪﺭ ﻤﻳﺎﻦ ﻴک ﻓﺻﻞ ﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍک ﺟﺴﺘﺟﻭ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻛﺭﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭙﺮﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻌﺪﻯ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﻴﺮ ﻨﻭﻴﺲ ﻣﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺍﺷﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺩ ‪.‬ﺸﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺪﺭ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺯﺒﺎﻧﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻧﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ﻴﺎ ‪،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺘﺮﺠﻴﺢ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻓﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻤﻭﺶ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺪﻯﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﺘﺎ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻧﻭﻴﺮ ﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﻤﺨﺗﻟﻒ ﺪﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺎﺩ�‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻜﺮارى‬
‫ﺘﺭﺍک ‪،‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﻔﻌﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻴک ﻘﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﺸﺪﻩ )‪ ،(A-B‬ﻴﺎﺘﻤﺎﻢ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶدىوىدى‪/‬ﺳۑدى وﺪﺋﻮﻰ )‪(DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﻓﺻﻝ )‪ ،(chapter‬ﻋﺑﻭﺍﺏ )‪ ، (title‬ﺪﭕﺳﮏ )‪ ،(disc‬ﺘﺭﺍﻙ )‪ (track‬ﻴﺎ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ�‬
‫ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻔﺻﻝ ﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ ﺍﻨﺟﺎﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ ﻭﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻴﺩ ﺌﻭﻴﻰ ﭙﺨﺵ ﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭﺪﻴﺴک ﻴﺎ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻢ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﻧﺪ�‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ )‪ � (chapter‬ﻔﺻﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻞ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺮﺍﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺪ�‬
‫ﻋﺑﻭﺍﺏ )‪ � (title‬ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻞ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺮﺍ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺪ�‬
‫ﺪﭕﺳﮏ )‪ � (disc‬ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻞ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺮﺍ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺪ�‬
‫ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺵ )‪: (Repeat‬‬
‫ﺘﺭﺍﻙ )‪ � (track‬ﺘﺭﺍﻛﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻞ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺮﺍ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺪ�‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎدهﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ‪A-B Repeat‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺭﺍﺪﺭ ﻤﺤﻠﻰ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺘﻛﺮ ﺍﺭﻯ )‪ (A‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻭﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺭﺍﺪﺭ ﻨﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺘﻛﺮ ﺍﺭﻯ )‪ (B‬ﻣﺘﻭﻘﻒ ﺷﻭﺪ‪ ،‬ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺘﻤﺎﺸﺎﻯ ﻋﺎﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ CANCEL‬ﺮﺍ ﺪﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬‫‪ .٣‬ﺠﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺘﺎ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ‪) Repeat : Off‬ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺮ ‪ :‬ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺵ( ﺮﺍﻨﺷﺎﻥ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫‪ REPEAT A-B -‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (A‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺘﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻛﺭﺪ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺮ ﻣﻤﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻨﺪ�‬‫‪ -‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻣﻳﻜﻪ ‪ Disc Menu،VCD‬ﻣﻤﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻨﺪ�‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺕ ‪) USB HOST‬ﻤﻴﺯﺑﺎﻦ ‪(USB‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﻭﺴﻴﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺒﻪ ﺪﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺪﺮ ﺠﻠﻭﻱ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺐ ﻴﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺪﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ �ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺪﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪) OK‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺰد ﭘﺨﺶ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ AVI‬ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﻨﮔﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺼﻭﺗﻲ ﻮ ﺗﺼﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﺒﻜﺎﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺩ� ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺕ ‪ AVI‬ﻛﻪ ﭙﺴﻭﻨﺪ “ ‪ ”avi‬ﺩﺍﺮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﺭﺪ�‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺴﻴﻧﻲ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ �ﺩﻴﺴک ﺍﺒﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺴﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﮔﺬﺍﺭﻴﺪ �ﺴﻴﻧﻲ ﺭﺍﺐﺒﻧﺪﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺠﻬﺕ ﺌﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ ، (DivX/XviD) avi‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ †‪ π/‬ﺍﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺒﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ ﭙﺧﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺭﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ �ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ )‪ ، (Off‬ﺘﺭﺍﻙ )‪ ، (Track‬ﻓﻭﻟﺩﺭ )‪ (Folder‬ﻭ‬
‫‪) A-B‬ﻴک ﻓﺎﺼﻠﻪ ﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻗﻃﻪ ﻣﺷﺧﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺴﻂ ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺮ(�‬
‫ ﺘﺭﺍﻙ )‪ : (Track‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻜﻧﺪ�‬‫ ﻓﻭﻟﺩﺭ )‪ : (Folder‬ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ AVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻤﻲ ﻛﻧﺩ ﻜﻪ ﺪﺭ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻌﻟﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺒﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ�‬‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ )‪(Off‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺼﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻟﻜﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺮﺪ ﺷﺪﻦ‬
‫ﻴﺎ‬
‫)‬
‫(‬
‫ﺠﺴﺗﺠﻭ‬
‫ﻴﺎ‬
‫)‬
‫(‬
‫ﭙﺧﺵ ﺤﺮﻜﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻫﺴﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ ۵‬ﺪﻗﻴﻗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻗﺏ ﻴﺎ ﺠﻠﻭ ﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺩ�‬
‫ﻴﺎ‬
‫( ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺠﺴﺗﺠﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﺑﻴﺷﺘﺭ‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻲ ﺩﻫ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺴﺭﻋﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺭ ﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ AVI‬ﺠﺴﺗﺠﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ� )‪(x٨،x۴،x٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺴﺭ ﻋﺕ ﻛﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺪﺮ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ AVI‬ﺠﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ� )‪(۴١/١،x٨/١،x۴/١،x٢/١‬‬
‫ﺎﻴﻦ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻤﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺪ ﻔﺮ ﻣﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻮﻴﺩﻮﺌﻲ ﺮﻴﺭ ﻂﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ AVI‬ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪DivX 3.11‬‬‫ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪) DivX4‬ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻲ ﺒﻪ ‪(MPEG4 Simple Profile‬‬‫ ﻣﺣﺗﻮﻴﺎﺕ ‪) DivX5‬ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻲ ﺒﻪ ‪ MPEG4 Simple Profile‬ﺑﺎﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺨﺎﺼﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﻂﺮﻔﻪ�‬‫ﻭ ‪ GMC‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺸﻮﻧﺪ�(‬
‫ ﻣﺤﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪�XviD MPEG4‬‬‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻣﻪ ﻘﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻛﻴﻛﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺤﺪﺍﻜﺛﺮ ﺯﻴﺭ ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻨﺩ�‬
‫‪DivX5‬‬
‫‪720 x 480 @30fps‬‬
‫‪720 x 576 @25fps‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺍﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺭﻳﺕ ‪4Mbps :‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻜﺮ‬
‫ ﺒﺿﻲ ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻤﭙﻳﻮﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻤﻲ ﺷﻭﻨﺪ ﻢﻤﻛﻦ ﺎﺴﺕ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻨﺸﻮﻨﺩ� ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻝ‬‫ﻨﻭﻉ ‪ ، Codec‬ﻧﺴﺧﻪ ﻮ ﻗﺪﺮﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴک ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻮﻱ ﻤﺸﺧﺻﺎ ﺕ ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻨﻤﻲ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﻨﻮﺸﺗﻪ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺪﺭ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻤﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ”ﻔﺮﻤﺖ ‪ “ISO9660‬ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻜﻧﺩ�‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻘﺎده از ﻓﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) USB HOST‬ﻣﺰﺑﺎن ‪(USB‬‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ ‪(DVD-C450K,C450,C360‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﺗﻮ ﺍﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻤﺗﺻﻞ ﻜﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺯﺍﺖ ﺫﺨﻴﺮﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺪﺭ ﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻧﻨﺩﻩ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺴﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻮﺴﻴﻗﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺭﻩ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺪﺮ ﻴﻚ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻨﺩﻩ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺩﻭﺮﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻴﺠﻴﺘﺎﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺎ ﺣﺎﻔﻆﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺼﺩﺍ ﻠﺬﺕ ﺒﺑﺭﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﺗﺬﻜﺮ‬
‫ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻜﻪ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﻮﻱ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ ‪ ،‬ﭙﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺴﻴﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺶ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﻤﻲ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬‫ ”‪ “USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺼﻓﺤﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻴﺶ ﺩﻴﺩﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺸﺩ�‬‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ CD‬واﺗﺼﺎل ‪) “Press USB to select device”، USB‬ﺑﺮاﯼ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ USB ،‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬‫دﻫﻴﺪ( ﺑﺮاﯼ ﻳﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ در ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ دادﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ‪) USB MENU‬ﻣﻨﻭﻱ ‪ (USB‬ﺪﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻮﻦ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺎﻦ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻮ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻤﻲ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬‫ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺷﺗﻦ ﺍﻴﻣﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺠﻟﻮﮔﻴﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺭﺍﺐ ﺷﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺫﺨﻴﺭﻩ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺪﺭ ﻭﺴﻴﻟﻪ ‪ ، USB‬ﭙﻴﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺠﺩﺍ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﺴﻴﻢ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺩ ﻣﺭ ﺤﻠﻪﺭﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺠﺩﺍﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻴﻤﻦ ﺍﺠﺭﺍ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪) STOP‬ﺗﻭﻗﻒ( ) ( ﺮﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ﻛﺎﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ�‬‫ﺭﺩ ﻜﺮﺩﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺠﻠﻮ‪/‬ﻋﻗﺏ‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ ‪،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ) ‪ ( /‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺪ�‬
‫ﺭﺍﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻤﻲ ﻴﺩ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺐﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺪ�‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺒﻴﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻴﻙ ﻔﺎﻴﻞ ﻭﺠﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ‬‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﺴﺭﻴﻊ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻴﻚ ﻔﺎﻴﻞ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺪﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻤﻭﻗﻌﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺴﺮﻴﻊ ﺩﻴﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ) ‪ ( /‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻭﻞ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻫﺭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻴﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻤﻲ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪،‬ﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻭﺾ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺩ�‬
‫‪٢x ➞ ۴x ➞ ٨x.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺴﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺯﺍﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺴﺗﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮ ﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻨﺑﻭﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻨﺴﺧﻪ ‪ 1.0‬ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻛﻧﻨﺪ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺯﺍﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻭﺍﻦ ﻴﻚ ﺩﻴﺴﻙ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺸﺗﻨﻲ ﺪﺭ ‪ 2000) Windows‬ﻴﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺗﺮ( ﺒﺪﻭﻦ ﻨﻴﺎﺰ ﺒﻪ ﻨﺻﺏ ﺪﺭﺍﻴﻭﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻨﻧﺩ�(‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻨﺪﻩ ‪ � MP3‬ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﺯ ﻨﻭﻉ ﻓﻟﺶ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺪﻭﺮﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻴﺟﻴﺗﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺒﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺴﺗﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺭﻩ ﺴﺎﺰﻱ ﺍﻧﺑﻮﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻧﺴﺧﻪ ‪ 1.0‬ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻜﻧﻨﺩ�‬
‫• ﺪﻭﺮﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻭﺍﻦ ﻴﻙ ﺩﻴﺳﻚ ﺒﺭﺪﺍﺸﺗﻧﻲ ﺪﺭ ‪ 2000) Windows‬ﻴﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺪﺗﺮ( ﺑﺪﻭﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺒﻪ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺩﺭﺎﻴﻭﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻔﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻤﻲ ﻛﻧﻨﺩ�‬
‫‪ �۴‬ﻔﻟﺵ ﺩﺭﺍﻴﻮ ‪ : USB‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ USB2.0‬ﻴﺎ ‪ USB1.1‬ﭙﺸﺘﻴﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﻨﺪ�‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻴﻚ ﻭﺴﻴﻠﻪ ‪ USB1.1‬ﻭﺼﻞ ﺷﻭﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺗﻘﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺪﺭ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺕ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺮﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �۵‬ﻛﺎﺭﺖ ﺧﻭﺍﻦ ‪ : USB‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻛﻲ ﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺨﻭﺍﻦ ‪ USB‬ﭽﻨﺩﺗﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺮﺕ ﺨﻭﺍﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺒﺴﺗﻪ ﺒﻪ ﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻭﺭﺪ ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﮔﻴﺭﺪ�‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﭽﻨﺩﻴﻦ ﺤﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﺮﺕ ﺨﻭﺍﻥ ﭼﻧﺩﺗﺎﺌﻲ ﻭﺼﻞ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺸﺎﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻤﺸﻛﻠﻼﺗﻲ ﺮﻭﺒﺭﻭ ﺸﻭﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �۶‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻴﻙ ﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻤﻛﺎﻦ ﺪﺍﺮﺪ ﻭﺴﻴﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺷﻨﺎﺨﺗﻪ ﻨﺷﻭﺪ�‬
‫• ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻤﻭﺭﺪ ﭙﺷﺘﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫• ‪) CBI‬ﻜﻨﺘﺮﻞ ‪ /‬ﻋﻣﺩﻩ ‪ /‬ﻮﻗﻔﻪ( ﭙﺷﺘﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻣﻲ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬
‫• ﺪﻭﺮﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻴﺠﻴﺗﺎﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭙﺭﻭﺘﻛﻞ ‪ PTP‬ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩﻭ ﻴﺎ ﻨﻴﺎﺯ ﻤﻨﺪ ﻨﺼﺏ ﺑﺭﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻞ ﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﻤﭙﻴﻭﺘﺭ ﻫﺴﺗﻧﺩ ﭙﺷﺘﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻣﻲ ﺷﻭﺩ�‬
‫• ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﺌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺎﺯ ﺴﻴﺴﺗﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ‪ NTFS‬ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻧﻨﺪ ﭙﺷﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ�‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻃ ﺴﻴﺴﺗﻢ ﻔﺎﻴﻞ ‪) 16/32 FAT‬ﺠﺩﻮﻞ ﺗﺧﺼﻴﺺ ﻔﺎﻳﻞ ‪ (16/32‬ﭙﺷﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺸﻮﺩ�(‬
‫• ﺒﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﻤﻭﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺸﻭﻨﺪ ﺸﺎﻴﺪ ﺒﺴﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻨﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﺴﻛﺗﻭﺮ ﺴﻴﺴﺗﻡ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ﺧﻭﺪ ﻨﺗﻭﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻜﻧﻨﺪ�‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺒﻟﻴﺕ ‪) USB HOST‬ﻤﻴﺯﺒﺎﻦ ‪ (USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺼﻭﺮﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺻﻮﻞ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺴﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﺎ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺺ‬
‫ﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺪﺭ ﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻞ ﻤﻧﺗﻗﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺸﻮﺪ�‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺠﻬﻴﺯﺍﺕ ‪) MTP‬ﭙﺭﻮﺗﻛﻞ ﺗﺑﺎﺪﻞ ﺭﺴﺎﻧﻪ( ﺑﺎ ‪ Janus‬ﻓﻌﺎﻞ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻣﻰ ﻜﻨﺪ�‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺒﻟﻴﺕ ‪) USB Host‬ﻣﻴﺯﺑﺎﻦ ‪ (USB‬ﺍﻴﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻢ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ USB‬ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻨﻣﻲ ﻜﻨﺪ�‬
‫ﺒﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺒﻴﺸﺗﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻭﺺ ﺗﺠﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺴﺎﺰ ﮔﺎﺮ ﺒﻪ ﺻﻓﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﭘﺎكﻛﺮدنﻳﻚ ‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‪ �٣-١‬ﺴﻪ ﻣﺭﺤﻟﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﻤﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺤﻞ ‪ ″‬ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻜﺮﺩﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻟﻜﺮﺩ ‪�″Bookmark‬‬
‫‪ �۴‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺸﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻨﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺩ ﺤﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �۵‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ CANCEL‬ﺮﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻴک ﺷﻣﺎﺮﻩ ﻋﻼﻤﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪CD-R MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﻜَﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ WMA‬رادر ‪ CD-R‬ﺿﺒﻂﻣۑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ رادرﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ WMA‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﻳﺎ ‪ JOLIET‬ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﺮﻤﺕ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﻮ ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ Joliet MP3‬ﻴﺎ ‪ WMA‬ﻴﺎ ‪Microsoft DOS‬‬
‫ﻴﺎ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻴﺎ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ ‪ Apple Mac‬ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺒﺎﺷﻨﺩ �ﺍﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻤﺕ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻠﺗﺭﻴﻦ ﻓﺭﻤﺕ ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺴﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ�‬
‫اﺳﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺎ ﻣﮕﺬارى ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ , WMA‬از ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﺣﺮف ﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ‪,‬‬‫وﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ را ﺑﺼﻮرت ”‪ “MP3,.WMA‬وارد ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺳﻔﺎده از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ )‪(DVD-C350K,C350) (DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ZOOM‬ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﻜﻧﺘﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ�‬
‫ﻓﺮﻤﺕ ﻨﺎﻢ ﻋﻣﻮﻤﻰ ‪ mp3”. :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ”ﻴﺎ“ ‪ wma.‬ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ“ ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﺴﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ ﺨﻭﺩ ‪ ,‬ﻤﻂﻣﺌﻦ ﺸﻭﻴﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‪ ٨‬ﺣﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺗﺮ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ ‪ ,‬ﻔﺎﺼﻠﻪ ﺨﺎﻟﻰ ﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﻢ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺒﻜﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺭﻯ ﺣﺭﻭﻒ ﻭﻴﮋﻩ ﺯﻴﺭ ﺨﻮﺩﺪﺍﺭﻯ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ ‪�(.,/,\,=+) :‬‬
‫ ازﻳﻚ ﻧﺮخ اﻧﺘﻔﺎل ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻰ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻮﺑﺎﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ درزﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى‬‫‪ MP3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻔﺎده از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻰ )‪(DVD-C450K,C450,C360) (DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﻜﻧﺘﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ†‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺐ ﻤﻳﺎﻨﺑﺭ )‪ (Shortcut‬ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺐ ﻨﺯﺭڪﻧﻣﺎﻴﻰ )‪ (Zoom‬ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ -‬ﺪﺮ ﺨﻼﻝ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ‪،‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺯﺭ ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺘﺮﺗﻳﺏ ‪/x۴/x٣/x٢‬ﻤﻌﻤﻭﻠﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ‪MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎﻯ ‪ MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4‬ﺤﺎﻭﻯ ﺁﻫﻧﮔﻬﺎﻯ ﺘﻛﻰ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﻴﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻭﻳﺭﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻧﺪ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺪﺭ‬
‫ﭙﻭﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺘﻴﺐ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﻩﻭﺩ� ﺍﻴﻦ ﻤﻭﺍﺮﺪ ﻤﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻰ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻜﻪﺪﺭ ﺮﺍﻴﺎﻨﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﻘﺭﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻦ ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺪﺭ‬
‫ﭙﻭﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﻳﺪ�‬
‫ﺴﻴﻨﻰ ﺪﻳﺴک ﺭﺍﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ� ﺩﻳﺴک ﺭﺍﺭﻭﻯ ﺴﻳﻧﻰ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺴﻳﻧﻰ ﺭﺍﺒﺑﻨﺩﻴﺩ ﺴﻳﻧﻰ ﺒﺳﺗﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﺩﻭ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪001/004‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻮﺷ‬
‫ﭙﻭﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻔﻗﻂ ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ ‪ stop‬ﺍﻧﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺮﺪ�‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮاى ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶﭘﻮﺷﻪ اﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺒﻰ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺎﺪﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﻓﺗﻦ ﺒﻪ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺪﺮ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺎ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺧﺎﺏ ”‪ “..‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺮﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺭﻓﺗﻦ ﺒﻪ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻤﺎﺪﺭ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ�‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪MP3/WMA/CD‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺴﻴﻨﻰ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ �ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺭﻮﻯ ﺴﻴﻧﻰ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ �ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺴﻴﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺑﻨﺩﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻴک ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ﺁﻫﻨگ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ� ﺑﺭﻏﺎﻯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ﺁﻫﻨگ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻜﺮارى‪/‬ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﭼﺧﺶ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ �ﭽﻬﺎﺮ ﺣﺎﻠﺕ ﻮﺠﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ ‪ :‬ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺘﺭﺍﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﻟﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺘﻓﺎﻘﻰ‬
‫ ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺵ )‪ : (Off‬ﭽﺧﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ‬‫ ﺘﺭﺍﻙ )‪ : (Track‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻫﻨگ ﻔﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ�‬‫ ﻓﻭﻟﺩﺭ )‪ : (Folder‬ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺴﻮﻨﺪ ﻣﺷﺎﺒﻪ ﺪﺭ ﭙﻮﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻣﻰﺔﺓ ﻜﻨﺩ�‬‫ ﺍﺘﻓﺎﻘﻰ )‪ : (Random‬ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺁﻫﻧﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺮﺍﻯ ﭙﺴﻭﻧﺪ ﻤﺸﺎﺒﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﻨﺪ ﺒﻪ ﺗﺭﺗﻴﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻔﻰ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺨﻮﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺪ�‬‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ CANCEL‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ�‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻜﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺪﺭ ﻔﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﺴﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﺒﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺷﺮﺪﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻯ ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺪﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺪ� ﺑﺪﺴﺕ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺼﺩﺍﻳﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻜﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﺒﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻨﻣﻭﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﺭﻯ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻭگ ‪ /‬ﺩﻴﺟﻴﺗﺎﻞ ﻨﻴﺎﻞ ﻨﻴﺎﺯ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ �ﻴﻌﻨﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺒﻪ ﺤﺩﺍﻘﻞ ﻨﺭﺥ ﻨﻣﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﺭﻯ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺪﺮ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻮ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺛﺮ ‪ ١۶٠‬ﻜﻴﻟﻭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ�‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻨﺭﺧﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﻻﺘﺭ ‪ ,‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺩ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻴﺎ ﺒﻴﺸﺗﺭ ‪ ,‬ﺑﻧﺪﺮﺕ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺕ ﺻﺩﺍﻯ ﺑﻬﺘﺭﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ�‬
‫ﺒﺭﻋﻛﺲ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻠﺖ ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻧﺮﺧﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺭﺩﻦ ﻔﺷﺮﺪﮔﻰ ﭙﺎ ﺌﻳﻨﺗﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺪﺮ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺩ‬
‫ﺒﻂﻭﺮ ﺻﺣﻴﺢ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻧﺨﻭﺍﻫﻧﺪ ﺸﺪ�‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺎى ‪ WMA‬ازﻧﺮخ اﻧﺘﻔﺎل ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻰ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ در‬‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺼﺩﺍﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ WMA‬ﺍﺴﺎﺴﺎ� ﺒﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺒﻪ ﻨﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺪﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻯ ‪ /‬ﻛﺮﺪﻦ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺐ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺳﺘﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ‬
‫ﺒﺩﺴﺖ ﺁﻭﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺕ ﺼﺩﺍﻯ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻨﺮﺥ ﻨﻣﻭﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺁﻨﺎﻠﻭگ ‪ /‬ﺩﻴﺠﻴﺗﺎﻞ ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺮﺪ ‪.‬ﻴﻌﻧﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻴﻞ ﺒﻪ ﻔﺭﻣﺕ‬
‫‪ WMA‬ﺒﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻞ ﻨﺮﺥ ﻨﻣﻮﻨﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ‪ ۶۴‬ﻛﻴﻟﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺣﺩﺍﻜﺛﺮ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻨﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ�‬
‫ﺑﺭ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ ,‬ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﻨﺮﺨﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﮔﻰ ﭙﺎﺋﻴﻧﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۶۴‬ﻜﻳﻠﻮ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ‬
‫ﺪﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﺑﻂﻭﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﭽﺧﺵ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺪ�‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ﺣﻔﺎﺖ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮدارى ‪ MP3‬راﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻔﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻯ “ ﺣﻔﺎﻈﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ “ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺠﻠﻭﮔﻴﺭﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﺪﺍﺭﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻨﻰ ﺮﻤﺯ ﮔﺫﺍﺮﻯﻮ ﺤﻓﺎﻅﺕ ﻛﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻨﻭﺍﻉ ﺯﻴﺮ ﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺩ ‪) MediaTM Windows :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﺟﺎﺮﻯ ﺷﺮﻜﺕ ‪(Microsoft‬‬
‫ﻮ ‪) SDMITM‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺗﺠﺎﺮﻯ ﺒﻧﻴﺎﺩ ‪ (SDMI‬ﻨﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻴﻨﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺧﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ�‬
‫ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪:‬‬‫ﺻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ ﺗﺿﻣﻴﻨﻰ ﺪﺭ ﻣﻭﺮﺪ ﺍﻴﻨﻛﻪ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺍﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯﻭﻯﺩﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺭﺪ ﺗﻠﻗﻰ ﻨﻤﻭﺪ ﻴﺎ ﺁﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻭﺍﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻰ ﻧﻮﺍﻦ ﺗﺿﻤﻴﻨﻰ ﺒﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺼﺪﺍﺪﺮ ﻨﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻔﺕ ‪.‬ﺑﺎﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺠﻪ ﺪﺍﺸﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺸﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﺍﺯﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺮﻴﻬﺎﻮ ﺮﻮﺷﻬﺎﻯ ﺿﺑﻃ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﻭﻯ ‪ CD-R‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﺰﭙﺧﺶ ﺒﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﺪﺭ ﭽﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺪﻯﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺠﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﻤﻰ ﻛﻧﺩ )ﺍﻓﺕ ﻜﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺼﺪﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺧﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺪ ‪,‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻨﺎﻴﻰ ﭽﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺨﻮﺍﻨﺩﻥ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ(�‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺘﻮﺍﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﻔﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﺪﺭﻫﺮ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﺩ�‬
‫ﺗﻐﺮ دادن ﻣﻨﻮىﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﺗﻨﻈﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻭﻯ ‪ Setup‬ﺒﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺘﺎ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﻧﻨﺩﻩ ﺩﻯﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺐ ﺗﺮﺠﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻑ ﺯﻧﺎﻦ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﺴﻂﺢ ﻮﺍﻟﺩﻴﻦ ‪,‬ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻡ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻭ ﻴﺯﻴﻮﻧﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻴﺪ ‪,‬ﺴﻓﺎﺭﺸﻰ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻴﺩ‬
‫‪ �١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ‪ Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ ‪،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ † ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﺴﺗﺭﺴﻰ ﺒﻪ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺘﻠﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺪﺴﺘﺭﺴﻰ ﺒﻪ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻴﻬﺍﻯ ﻓﺭﻋﻰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺤﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻦ ﺻﻓﺤﻪ ﺗﻧﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻡ ﻛﺭﺩﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺘﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺠﻪ ﺒﻪ ﻨﻮﻉ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪ ،‬ﺒﺭﺧﻰ ﺍﺰﮔﺯﻴﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ Setup Menu‬ﻣﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻨﻛﻨﺪ�‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى زﺑﺎن‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺩﻩ ‪،‬ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک‪ ،‬ﺼﺩﺍ ﻮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺰﻴﺭ ﻧﻮﻴﺲ ﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻄﻴﻢ ﻛﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻜﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ�‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از زﺑﺎن ‪Player Menu‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻤﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺪﺮ ﺣﺎﻠﺕ ﺘﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﺴﺖ ‪،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺰﺒﺎﻥ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﺘﻧﻂﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ † ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺘﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺧﺎﺐ ﻤﻯ ﺸﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺼﻓﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻮﻯ ”ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ )‪ “(Language Setup‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺭﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺣﻮ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻣﻧﻭﻯ ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺭﻮﻯ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺿﺒﻄ ﻨﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻘﺒﻝ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻤﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻤﻰ ﺨﻮﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺼﻮﺘﻰ ﭙﻴﺵ ﻔﺭﺽ ﺒﺎ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﺼﻠﻰ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺳک ﻴﻛﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪” ،‬ﺍﺼﻠﻰ )‪ “(Original‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻤﻰ ﺨﻮﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺰﻴﺭ ﻨﻮﻴﺱ ﺒﺎ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺼﺩﺍ ﻤﺸﺎﺒﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪” ،‬ﺨﻮﺩﻜﺎﺭ )‪ “(Autiomatic‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺭﺨﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻴﺳﻛﻬﺎ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺤﺎﻮﻯ ﺰﺒﺎﻨﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﻮﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ ﻨﺒﺎﺸﻧﺩ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺍﺯ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺼﻠﻰ ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﻜﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﮔﺯ ﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺒﻪ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺼﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻣﺎﺖ ﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﺕ ﺼﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺘﻮﺠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺴﻴﺴﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺗﻰ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻤﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺪﺮ ﺣﺎﻠﺕ ﺘﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﺴﺖ ‪،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺼﻭﺘﻰ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﺘﻧﻂﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ † ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺘﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻜﻪ ‪ PCM Down Sampling‬ﺭﻮﻯ ‪ Off‬ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺨﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﻔﻗﻁ ﺼﺪﺍﻯ ﻧﻣﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﻬﺎﺮﻯ ﺸﺩﻩﺪﺮ ﺴﻁﺢ‬‫ﭙﺎﺌﻴﻧﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻂﺭﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﻮﺠﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺪﻴﺠﻴﺗﺎﻞ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻨﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻣﺗﻴﺎﺯ ‪ Dolby Laboratories‬ﺴﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ �ﻋﻼﻤﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ”‪ “Dolby‬ﻭ ‪ double-D‬ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ Laboratories Dolby‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ� ”‪ “DTS‬ﻮ ”‪ “ DTS Digital Out‬ﻋﻼﺌﻢ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﺷﺭﻛﺖ ‪ Digital Theater System‬ﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺷﻨﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﮔﺯ‬
‫‪�١‬‬
‫‪�٢‬‬
‫‪�٣‬‬
‫ﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺵ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻣﻟﻜﺭ ﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺗﻟﻑ ﻭﻴﺪ ﺌﻭﻴﻰ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻤﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺪﺮ ﺣﺎﻠﺕ ﺘﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﺴﺖ ‪،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻨﺷﺎﻥ ﺒﺩﻫﻰ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﺘﻧﻃﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ † ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ ﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ ﺘﺎ ﻤﻌﻠﻮﻢ ﺸﻮﺩ ﻜﻪ ﺁﻴﺎ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﺯﻴﻮﻨﺘﺎﻦ ﺍﺰ ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﭙﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻨﺩﻩ ﺤﻤﺎﻴﺕ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﭙﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﻨﺩﻩ ﭙﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻔﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﭙﻴﺵ ﺮﻭﻨﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺨﺭﻭﺠﻲ ﻮ ﻴﺩﺌﻮ‬‫ﺒﻄﻮﺭ ﻨﺎﺼﺤﻳﺢ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﺸﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﻨﻤﺎﻴﺶ ﻤﺴﺩﻭﺩ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺭﺍﻱ ﺠﺭﻴﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻔﺘﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺭ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦﻭﻳﺎ ﭙﺭﻭﮋﻜﺘﻭﺭ ﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻴﻜﻪ ﻘﺩﺭﺕ ﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺤﻳﻦ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭ ﻜﺭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻤﻣﻛﻦ‬‫ﺍﺴﺕ ﭽﻧﺩ ﺜﺎﻨﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻨﺘﺮل واﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﻮﺍﻟﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻯﻮﻯﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺎﻦ ﺪﺭﺠﻪ ﺒﻧﺩﻯ ﺗﺨﺻﻴﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﺪﺭ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺩﻰﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺨﺎﻨﻭ ﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺩ‪ ،‬ﻜﻣک ﻣﻰ ﻜﻨﺩ �‪ ٨‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺪﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻧﺩﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻴک ﺪﻴﺴک ﻮﺠﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺮﺩ�‬
‫ردهﺑﻨﺪى ﺳﻨﻰ ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻛﻠﻤ ﻋﺒﻮر‬
‫‪�١‬‬
‫‪�٢‬‬
‫‪�٣‬‬
‫‪�۴‬‬
‫‪�۵‬‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ Menu‬ﺭﺍﻔﺸﺎﺮﺩﻫﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻮﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ † ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻮﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ‪ /‬ﺭﻤﺯﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺴﻂﺢ ﺩﺭﺠﻪ ﺒﻧﺪﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺛﺎﻞ( ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻦ ﺪﺮ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﮐﻭﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻜﻠﻣﻪ ﺭﻤﺯ ﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ 0000 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0000‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﻜﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ ﺪﻭﺒﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﮐﻭﺩﻙ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) G‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻋﺎﻡ( ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻩﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﻲ‬‫ ‪) PG‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ( ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻩﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻮﺩﺁﺎﻥ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) PG-13‬ﻩﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ( ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻮﺩﺁﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ 13‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) PGR‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ( ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻩﺎ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻮﺩﺁﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﻀﺎﻭﺕ ﺁﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬‬‫ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺁﻢ ﺳﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﺁﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) R‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ( ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ 17‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻩﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻩﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺁﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ : (NC-17) NC17‬ﻓﺮﺍﺩ ‪ 17‬ﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻩﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺁﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺯﺭﮔﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻜﻟﻣﻪ ﻋﺑﻮﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻭﺶ ﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻴﺩ ‪،‬ﺒﻪ ”ﻓﺮﺍﻤﻭﺶ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﻚﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ“ ﺪﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻋﻴﺏ ﻴﺎﺒﻰ ﻤﺭﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Setting up the DivX‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻤﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺪﺮ ﺣﺎﻠﺕ ﺘﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﺴﺖ ‪،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ DivX‬ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ † ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﺘﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ ‪Press Ok will make the registration code window disappear‬‬‫‪DivX can only be accessed at stop mode -‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻬ ﺳﻲدي )ﻔﻗﻁ ‪(DVD-C450K,C450,C360‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻟﻴﺖ ﺒﻪ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯ ﻩ ﻤﻲ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻴﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻓﺭﻣﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﻮﻱ ﻴﻚ ﻮﺴﻴﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺭﻴﺯﻴﺩ�‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺴﻳﻨﻲ ﺩﻴﺳﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺎﺯ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻴﻙ ﺴﻲ ﺩﻱ ﺼﻭﺘﻲ )‪ (CD DA‬ﺩﺭ ﺴﻴﻧﻲ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺱ ﺁﻨﺭﺍ ﺒﺑﻧﺩﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﻮﺴﻳﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺒﻪ ﻤﻳﺯﺒﺎﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺮ ﺠﻟﻭﻱ ﺪﺳﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻧﺪ ﻩ ﻮﺼﻝ ﻜﻧﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺪﻴﺳﮏﺪ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﺩﻴﺳﮏ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ †‪ ،π/‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪) ENTER‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻩﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻩﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻜﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻜﭙﻲ ﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻩﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪) ENTER‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻩﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻩﺎﻱ ® ﻳﺎ † ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) START‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪) ENTER‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻩﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻜﭙﻲ ﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) Ripping‬ﮐﭙﯽ( ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻩﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫ )‪ (Mode‬ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ‪ (Fast) :‬ﺴﺭﻴﻊ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺪﻯ )‪(Normal‬‬‫ ‪ ) Bitrate‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ... 128kbps => 192kbps => 256kbps => 320kbps‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬‫ ‪) Device selection‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪.(4‬‬‫ ‪) Select – Unselect‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ -‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪) Select all‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ( ﻳﺎ ‪) Select none‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻴﭻ( ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) Start ripping‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ(؛ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻨﻛﺗﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﻧﮔﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺴﻲ ﺪﻱ ﺪﺭ ﺣﺎﻞ ﺍﺠﺭ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ ،‬ﭙﺧﺵ ﻛﻨﻧﺪﻪ ﺒﻪ ﻂﻭﺮ ﺨﻭﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻭﺩ�‬‫ ﻓﻗﻁ ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (DC-DA‬ﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ�‬‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ، CDDA‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (CD CD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻜﺮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ٢،۶‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﻰدى ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪ �١‬ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﺪﻠﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺍﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻔﺎﻴﻞ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺪﺭ ﻤﻨﻮﻯ ﻗﻂﻌﺎﺕ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻨﻛﺗﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﺮﻭﻯ ﻛﻨﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺮ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﻧﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﻤﻨﻮ ﻣﺣﻭ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺩ�‬‫ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺷﺕ ﺒﻪ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﻗﻁﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ STOP‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ�‬‫ﭽﺭﺨﺶ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ®‪ √/‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﺁﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻩﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‬‫ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ π‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ�‬‫ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ † ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬‫ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺵ ﺍﺳﻼﻴﺩﻩﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Zoom‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ( ‪١٠٠%, ١٢٥%, ١٥٠%, ٢٠٠%:‬‬‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ play‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Jpeg‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻩﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬‫‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺩﻜﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻨﻛﺗﻪ‬
‫ ﺒﺴﺘﮔﻰ ﺒﻪ ﺍﻨﺩﺍﺰﻩ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ‪ ،‬ﻤﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺰﻤﺎﻨﻰ ﺒﻴﻦ ﻫﺭ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ﻣﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺒﺎ ﻔﺎﺼﻠﻪ ﺰﻤﺎﻨﻰ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻢﺸﺩﻩ ﻤﺘﻔﺎﻮﺕ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﻨﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺴﻼﻴﺩ ﺒﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭙﻳﺶ ﻔﺭﺾ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﺰ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ١٠‬ﺜﺎﻨﻳﻪ ﺒﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺘﻮﻤﺎﺘﻴک ﺸﺭﻮ ﻉ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﺎى ‪CD-R JPEG‬‬
‫ ﻔﻗﻁ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺴﻮﻨﺪ ”‪ “jpg‬ﻭ ”‪ “JPG‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﻧﺩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﮔﺭﺪﻨﺪ�‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺭ ﻂﻮﻞ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺎﺴﺏ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺩﻩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻧﺸﻭﻨﺩ�‬‫ ﻓﻗﻂ ﺩﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎﻯ ‪ CD-R‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺭ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﻴﺎ ‪ Joliet‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭙﺨﺵ ﮔﺮﺪﻧﺪ�‬‫ﻨﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺌﺯ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺸﺪ ﻭ ﻨﺑﺎﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻮﻯ ﻓﺎﺼﻟﻪ ﺧﺎﻠﻰ ﻴﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻒ ﻭﻴﮋﻩ ﺑﺎﺸﺩ )�‪�(+=/‬‬
‫ ﻓﻗﻁ ﻴک ﺪﻴﺴک ﭼﻨﺩ ﺠﻟﺴﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺗﺭﺗﻴﺑﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﮔﺮﺫﺩ �ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ ﺧﺎﻠﻰ ﺪﺭﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﭽﻨﺪ ﺠﻟﺴﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻮﺟﻭﺪ ﺪﺍﺷﺗﻪ‬‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻴﺴک ﺭﺍﻓﻗﻁ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺧﺶ ﺨﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺌﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﺭﺩ�‬
‫ ﺤﺩﺍﻛﺛﺮ ﺘﺎ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﺘﺼﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺗک ﺿﺑﻃ ﻧﻣﻭﺪ�‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﺩﺍک ﺗﻭﺼﻳﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﻨﺩ�‬‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ ﺗﺼﻭﻴﺭ ﻛﺩﺍک ‪ ،‬ﻓﻗﻁ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺮ ﭙﻭﺸﻪ ﻋﻛﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﻤﻰ ﺗﻬﺍﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻛﺭﺩ�‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻛﺲ ﻛﺪﺍک � ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺭ ﭙﻮﺸﻪ ﻋﻛﺴﻬﺎ ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﻭﻣﺎﺗﻴک ﭙﺧﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺩ�‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﻮﻧﻴﻛﺎ � ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺸﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻭﻯ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ ﻋﻛﺲ ﻓﻮﺠﻰ � ﺍﮔﺭﻣﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺩ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ‪،‬ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺭ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ�‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻛﺲ ‪ � QSS‬ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺩ ﺩﻴﺴک ﻋﻛﺲ ‪ QSS‬ﺭﺍﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺩ�‬‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ ﺪﺭ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪ ١‬ﺑﻴﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻓﻂ ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺸﻮﻨﺪ�‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻴﺴک ‪ ١‬ﺑﻴﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺰ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺸﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻔﻘﻄ ﭙﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺩ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺸﻭﻨﺩ�‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدﻫﺎي ‪Karaoke‬‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدﻫﺎي ‪Karaoke‬‬
‫روﻧﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻁ ‪(DVD-C450K,C350K‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط را ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻳﺎ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﺮ وﺻﻞ آﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن را ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎدﮔﻲ ‪ Mic‬وﺻﻞ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ� ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ MIC‬وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدﻫﺎي ‪ Karaoke‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ ﻜﺮد�‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪Mic Volume /‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ‪ Karaoke‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮي ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎي دﻟﺨﻮاﻩ�‬
‫ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ KARAOKE‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ‪ Mic Volume‬ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ ‪،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ KARAOKE‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ‪�keycon‬‬‫‪ �٢‬ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻮض ﻜﺮدن ﻧﻮاي دﻟﺨﻮاﻩ دﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي ®‪ √/‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Karaoke‬ﺻﺪاي ﻧﺎهﻨﺠﺎري )ﺟﻴﻎ زدن ﻳﺎ زوزﻩ ﻛﺸﻴﺪن( ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن را از ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ‬‫دور ﻛﺮدﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪاي ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ را ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ�‬
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ Karaoke‬در زﻣﺎن ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ‪ DTS ،WMA ،MP3‬ﻭ ‪ LPCM‬ﻛﺎر ﻧﺨﻮاهﺪ ﻛﺮد�‬‫ اﮔﺮ ‪ MIC‬وﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ�‬‫‪ -‬از ‪ MIC‬ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬
‫ارﺗﻘﺎي ﺳﻔﺖ اﻓﺰار‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺪﺮﺧﻭﺍﺴﺕ ﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ )ﻋﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻴﺎﺑﻰ( ‪ ،‬ﻠﻂﻔﺎًﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻴﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺭﺴﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫اﻗﺪام‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ ■ /‬ﺪﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻛﻪ ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻰ ﺪﺭ ﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺑﺎﺸﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺒﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ‬‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣﻰ ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺮﺧﺎﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺕ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ�‬
‫ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﻛﻟﻼﺕ ﺪﻴﮔﺭﻯ ﻤﻮﺍﺠﻪ ﺷﺩﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ■ /‬ﺪﺭ ﺪﻳﺴﻜﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺑﺎﺸﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ �ﺘﻣﺎﻣﻰ ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻣﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺮ‬
‫ ﺩﻛﻣﻪ‬‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﹴﻆﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺨﺎﻨﻪ ﺒﺮﮔﺸﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻨﻣﻮﺩ �ﺍﻴﻦ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺑﺩﺍﻥ ﻨﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﻴﺩ�‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬
‫ﻨﻳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻯ ﻘﺩ ﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺒﺮﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺪﻭﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺪﻭﺪﻩ ﺭ ﻄﻮ ﺑﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫‪) AC‬ﻣﺗﻨﺎﻭﺐ( ‪١١٠‬ـ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺕ‪ ۶٠/۵٠ ،‬ﻫﺭ ﺗﺯ‬
‫‪ ١،۵‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﻛﺮ ﻡ )‪(DVD-C450K,C450‬‬
‫‪ ١،٢‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﻛﺮ ﻡ )‪(DVD-C360,C350K,C350‬‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪� DVD-C450K,C450‬‬
‫‪) ۴٢ mm‬ﻋﺭﺾ( ‪) ٢٠٧ mm X‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ۴٣٠ mm X‬ﻁﻮ ﻞ(‬
‫‪� DVD-C360,C350K,C350‬‬
‫‪) ۴٢ mm‬ﻋﺭﺾ( ‪) ٢٠٧ mm X‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٣۶٠ mm X‬ﻁﻮ ﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٥+°C‬ﺇﻠﻰ ‪٣۵+°C‬‬
‫‪ ٪١٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪٪٧۵‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻭ ﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭ ﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﭘﻭﻧﻧﺖ‬
‫‪ ١،٠ : Y‬ﻭﻠﺖ ﭘﻳڪ ﺘﻮ ﭙﻴڪ )‪ ٧۵‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺒﺎﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٠،٧٠: Pr‬ﻭﻠﺖ ﭘﻳڪ ﺘﻮ ﭙﻴڪ )‪ ٧۵‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺒﺎﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٠،٧٠: Pb‬ﻭﻠﺖ ﭘﻳڪ ﺘﻮ ﭙﻴڪ )‪ ٧۵‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺒﺎﺮ(‬
‫ﺠﺭ ﻭ ﺟﻰ ﺻﺩﺍ‬
‫* ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻔﺭﻛﺎﻨﺲ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﺭﺘﺯ ‪ ٢٠ -‬ﻜﺘﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺘﺯ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
.SAMSUNG ‫ ﻓﻴﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬،Samsung ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ (French)
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/ee
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
Contact Center 
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
Area
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Nicaragua
Honduras
Costa Rica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Jamaica
Panama
Puerto Rico
Rep. Dominica
Trinidad & Tobago
Venezuela
Colombia
02 201 2418
Belgium
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
02 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678), 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min)
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
U.K
Eire
Austria
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
Switzerland
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Russia
Kazakhstan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-502-0000
Ukraine
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
Belarus
Moldova
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
Australia
New Zealand
China
3698-4698
Hong Kong
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
‫ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‬SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE ‫ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯿﮑﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻈﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ (French)
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/ee
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
Philippines
www.samsung.com/ph
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
Turkey
South Africa
U.A.E
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
Middle East &
Africa
Contact Center 
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
Area
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Nicaragua
Honduras
Costa Rica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Jamaica
Panama
Puerto Rico
Rep. Dominica
Trinidad & Tobago
Venezuela
Colombia
02 201 2418
Belgium
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
02 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678), 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min)
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
U.K
Eire
Austria
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
Switzerland
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Russia
Kazakhstan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-502-0000
Ukraine
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
Belarus
Moldova
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
Australia
New Zealand
China
3698-4698
Hong Kong
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
Turkey
South Africa
U.A.E
Middle East &
Africa
AK68-01947A